Marketing Email

Salesforce, Summer ’24

Last updated: July 24, 2024

names and marks. Other marks appearing herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.

CONTENTS

EMAIL IN MARKETING CLOUD ENGAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Email Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

EMAIL IN MARKETING CLOUD ENGAGEMENT

Plan, personalize, segment, and optimize the customer journey with the email apps that are available in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Email Studio

With Email Studio, build and send personalized email from basic newsletters to the most complex campaigns. Deliver promotional,

transactional, and triggered messages. Track and optimize to drive performance.

Email Studio

With Email Studio, build and send personalized email from basic newsletters to the most complex campaigns. Deliver promotional,

transactional, and triggered messages. Track and optimize to drive performance.

Get Started with Email Studio

Welcome to Email Studio! We’re so glad you’re here. Onboarding to Email Studio can be intimidating, even for the most experienced

Trailblazers. This guide helps you navigate the setup process and make sure that you don’t miss a thing.

Folder Management in Email Studio

Folders are a great way to keep your account organized. Easily locate and access what you need in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud

Engagement. Start creating folders to organize your lists, data extensions, emails, templates, and content.

Email Studio Navigation

Use Email Studio’s primary navigation toolbar and the navigation pane to choose from a list of available items.

Email Studio Admin

Use Email Studio admin to perform actions in your Email Studio.

Content

Create content for your emails, and send your emails use Email Studio content creation tools. Create reusable content blocks, including

text, HTML, images, buttons, dynamic content, and A/B testing, to ensure that relevant messaging reaches the right person every

time.

Subscribers

A subscriber is a person who has opted to receive communications from your organization. You must have a valid email address for

each subscriber who receives emails. For each subscriber who receives SMS messages, you must have a valid phone number. You

can track additional information about subscribers using profile and preference attributes. Use the subscriber key to identify your

subscribers in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Create lists or data extensions to store your subscribers. Store email subscriber information

in lists or data extensions, and store SMS subscriber information in data extensions only. To segment your subscribers, create as

many lists and data extensions as you need. You populate the information in the lists and data extensions when you add or import

subscribers.

Interactions

Email Studio Interactions contain the communications and data processes that build and support your relationship with customers.

A/B Testing in Email Studio

A/B Testing is a market testing method in which you send two versions of your Email Studio communication to two test audiences

from your subscriber list. Track which version receives the highest unique open rate or highest click-through rate and send that

version to all remaining subscribers.

Tracking in Email Studio

Tracking is an aggregated collection of data that allows you to view critical elements such as email opens, clicks, undeliverable

messages, and other metrics online. You can also capture how many emails are forwarded and how many new subscribers each

forward generates. You can create a subscriber list from tracking data to monitor subscriber and list performance. Marketing Cloud

stores your tracking data for the life of your contract.

AppExchange Deliverability Partners

Marketing Cloud Engagement offers both standard deliverability features and access to a network of partners with advanced

deliverability tools whose products can be purchased via AppExchange . AppExchange deliverability partners have developed

products and features that meet various deliverability needs.

Partner Seed Lists

With the Partner Seed Lists feature, you can see inbox results within the AppExchange Partner applications.

Return Path Platform

Marketing Cloud Engagement offers Return Path tools to help you monitor your email deliverability and reputation, test creative

renders, learn how your subscribers are viewing your email, and more. The Return Path product integration is no longer offered.

Contact your account executive regarding interest in this product.

Email Studio Resources

View resource documentation for Email Studio and Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Reseller Account Administration

As a Reseller administrator, you control the setup of your client and demo accounts. Use the Admin section to configure and manage

users of your Reseller administrator account and the initial users of your client accounts in Email Studio.

Enterprise 2.0 Shared Items

A shared item is an email, template, portfolio, data extension, or content area that you control access to. Users outside the business

unit can access the shared item with the appropriate role and permission settings. For example, user with view only permissions

can view but not change a shared item.

Get Started with Email Studio

Welcome to Email Studio! We’re so glad you’re here. Onboarding to Email Studio can be intimidating, even for the most experienced

Trailblazers. This guide helps you navigate the setup process and make sure that you don’t miss a thing.

Get Access to Marketing Cloud Engagement

On the date that your contract activates, you receive a welcome email containing login instructions.

Configure Account and Security Settings

Configure your account with the Setup Assistant for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Configure Users and Roles in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Configure roles, permissions, and users for your Engagement account.

Configure Domain and IP Settings with Sender Authentication Package (SAP)

Customize your account branding using Sender Authentication Package (SAP), a Marketing Cloud tool.

Secure Your Domain with SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol certificate protects your customers and gives them confidence when interacting with your

content. If you purchased the SSL Certificate SKU, use one certificate per domain to secure your links, images, email content, and

CloudPages.

Get Started with Email StudioEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Import Subscribers and Other Data

You can import a subscriber list or other data into Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Create Content in Marketing Cloud Engagement

After you’ve set up a domain and imported your subscribers, you’re ready to craft some top-notch content in Content Builder and

Email Studio.

Send Your First Email

Make sure your emails reach their destinations by adhering to deliverability guidelines.

Develop Your Marketing Strategy

Use these resources to build a compelling email marketing strategy. And don’t forget to check out the Trailblazer Community to

find more ideas from other Marketing Cloud Engagement users.

Get Access to Marketing Cloud Engagement

On the date that your contract activates, you receive a welcome email containing login instructions.

If you don’t receive a welcome email:

•

Check your spam folder and confirm that the email address [email protected] is allowlisted.

•

Check the Tenant Information in your contract. Salesforce sends the welcome email to the External Tenant Owner’s email address.

•

If you still can’t find the email, contact your account executive for help.

Configure Account and Security Settings

Configure your account with the Setup Assistant for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

•

Use the Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup Assistant

•

Configure Marketing Cloud Engagement Account Settings

•

Configure Marketing Cloud Engagement Security Settings

Configure Users and Roles in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Configure roles, permissions, and users for your Engagement account.

•

Configure Marketing Cloud Engagement Roles and Permissions

•

Configure Marketing Cloud Engagement Users

Configure Domain and IP Settings with Sender Authentication Package (SAP)

Customize your account branding using Sender Authentication Package (SAP), a Marketing Cloud tool.

SAP features include:

•

Custom account branding

•

Private domain for email sending

•

Custom domain for CloudPages

•

Dedicated IP address

•

Reply mail management

If you purchased SAP, you receive an email from [email protected] 1–2 days after your contract activates. This email

contains the Sender Authentication Package (SAP) Quick Start Guide and an individualized form to set up your SAP.

Get Started with Email StudioEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Follow the instructions in the Quick Start Guide to complete these tasks:

•

Choose a unique domain or subdomain name

•

Decide whether to delegate or self-host

•

Decide how to manage replies

•

Review tips for successful sending

After you complete the tasks in the Quick Start Guide, complete your unique SAP form from the email. Watch these videos if you need

more help.

•

Video: How to Fill Out the Sender Authentication Package (SAP) Form

•

Video: How to Fill Out the Sender Authentication Package (SAP) Form Part 2

•

Video: Sender Authentication Package: Common Topics and FAQs

Secure Your Domain with SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol certificate protects your customers and gives them confidence when interacting with your

content. If you purchased the SSL Certificate SKU, use one certificate per domain to secure your links, images, email content, and

CloudPages.

•

Marketing Cloud Engagement SSL Certificates Overview

•

Secure a Custom Domain

Import Subscribers and Other Data

You can import a subscriber list or other data into Marketing Cloud Engagement.

•

Create a Data Extension in Contact Builder

•

Import into a Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Extension

Note: Marketing Cloud is now called Marketing Cloud Engagement. Until we finish changes across the Salesforce ecosystem, you

can expect to see some references to both names in Salesforce Help.

To import data from a third-party source or your own internal data warehouse use either Automation Studio or Marketing Cloud

Engagement APIs. To import data from Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or an Industry Cloud, use Marketing Cloud Connect. For more

information on data management and import, check out these links.

Data Management and Automation

•

Trailhead: Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Management

•

Expert Coaching: Marketing Cloud Engagement Data and Segmentation Basics

•

Implementation Guide: Automation Studio

•

Expert Coaching: Automate Data Imports

•

Expert Coaching: Automate Email Segmentation

Importing Data from Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or an Industry Cloud

•

Trailhead: Marketing Cloud Connect Setup

•

Implementation Guide: Marketing Cloud Connect

•

Expert Coaching: Use Marketing Cloud Connect

Get Started with Email StudioEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create Content in Marketing Cloud Engagement

After you’ve set up a domain and imported your subscribers, you’re ready to craft some top-notch content in Content Builder and Email

Studio.

•

Create your email. Be sure to incorporate your branding and personalize the content.

–

Trailhead: Create, Test, and Send an Email with Marketing Cloud Engagement

–

Implementation Guide: Content Builder

–

Expert Coaching: Email Personalization Basics

•

Preview and test your email. Check your images and links. Confirm that the unsubscribe link works.

–

Expert Coaching: Building, Testing, and Sending Email

Send Your First Email

Make sure your emails reach their destinations by adhering to deliverability guidelines.

•

Because your new IP address has never sent email before, you must warm your IP address to keep your emails from getting blocked

or sent to spam. Start sending email gradually to build volume over time. See IP Address Warming for Email Studio.

•

Review Email Deliverability Best Practices for Email Studio, and sign up for Expert Coaching on Deliverability.

Develop Your Marketing Strategy

Use these resources to build a compelling email marketing strategy. And don’t forget to check out the Trailblazer Community to find

more ideas from other Marketing Cloud Engagement users.

•

Trailhead: Marketing Cloud Engagement Trailblazer Community

•

Trailhead: Email Marketing Strategies

•

Trailhead: Advance Your Marketing Strategy

Folder Management in Email Studio

Folders are a great way to keep your account organized. Easily locate and access what you need in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud

Engagement. Start creating folders to organize your lists, data extensions, emails, templates, and content.

To create a folder, right-click in the appropriate folder space and select Create Folder or New Folder, as applicable. Rename, move, or

delete folders by right-clicking the folder’s name.

Email Studio Navigation

Use Email Studio’s primary navigation toolbar and the navigation pane to choose from a list of available items.

The primary navigation toolbar is at the top of the Email Studio app. Hide the navigation pane at any time by clicking the gray bar on

the right side of the pane. You can resize the pane by dragging the bar that separates the navigation pane from the workspace. The list

of available features in the primary navigation toolbar contains only those items you have permission to access.

•

Overview

•

Content

•

Subscribers

•

Interactions

Folder Management in Email StudioEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Tracking

•

Admin

Work with your admin to get access to features that don’t appear in your account.

Custom Navigation

Custom navigation allows you to create your own horizontal tabs to the primary navigation. To create more tabs for your users, add the

URL of a landing page. You can build these landing pages for specific needs or a more customized user experience.

Email Studio Admin

Use Email Studio admin to perform actions in your Email Studio.

Note: Access Email Studio Settings in Setup to manage details about your Marketing Cloud Engagement Email features. Setup

also contains other helpful sources of information about Engagement.

Review these settings for additional information.

Admin Setup for Marketing Cloud Engagement Email

Use Setup Assistant to configure Marketing Cloud Engagement Email.

Auto-Suppression Lists

Assign a suppression list for use across an entire Marketing Cloud Engagement tenant or for specific business units for specific send

classifications. You can assign auto-suppression lists at different levels of your account. Suppression lists filter out email addresses

and prevent those addresses from receiving Email Studio messages. Suppression lists serve as a do-not-contact list for your email

sends. Auto-suppression lists typically include addresses with a history of spam complaints, unsubscribe lists from previous providers

or advertisers, addresses of your competitors, and canceled customers.

iOS Universal Link

The iOS Universal Link feature allows links in Email Studio messages to open directly into previously installed apps on iOS devices.

This process is also known as deep linking into an app. By default, links embedded in an email message open in a browser window.

After implementing this feature, you can specify the app and location to open on iOS devices.

Android Deep Link Setup

Follow these steps to enable Android's deep-linking in Setup.

BrandBuilder

BrandBuilder allows you to customize the color scheme used within your Email Studio account. Use BrandBuilder to select color

schemes that match your company’s logo. You can use the color scheme when you design your email template to help maintain

brand integrity. Based on the colors of the logo you upload, BrandBuilder provides you with several pre-designed color schemes.

After you choose how to privately label your account, BrandBuilder applies the color scheme, providing your users with a branded

experience.

Subject and Preheader Validation

This feature displays a notification to the user to highlight words in the Subject and Preheader of emails prior to sending. The

notification warns users and prevents accidental live sends that contain test-related words in the subject and preheader.

Create a UI Extension

Follow these steps to create a UI extension in Email Studio. The UI extension lets you create a custom tab within the user interface

that displays the content of a different page. Users can click that tab to view the page within the context of the Marketing Cloud

Engagement user interface.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a Custom Tab

To enable a landing page of job-level tracking information, create a custom tab to display a link on your Email Studio tracking screen.

For more information about enabling this feature, contact your Marketing Cloud Engagement account representative.

Admin Setup for Marketing Cloud Engagement Email

Use Setup Assistant to configure Marketing Cloud Engagement Email.

Setup Assistant guides you to make full use of Engagement. Access Setup Assistant in the Setup menu of your Engagement account.

Purchase and Configure a Domain

Purchase and configure a Marketing Cloud Engagement domain if you don’t already have one. Purchase a domain then configure

it to point to Salesforce DNS servers for Engagement.

SEE ALSO:

Email Studio Admin

Purchase and Configure a Domain

Purchase and configure a Marketing Cloud Engagement domain if you don’t already have one. Purchase a domain then configure it to

point to Salesforce DNS servers for Engagement.

Only use a dedicated domain if you can’t support DNS delegation or DNS hosting. If applicable, you can purchase a domain for dedicated

use in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Follow our recommended best practices for naming your domain. If your company’s name is

Example and your primary domain is example.com, purchase a related domain such as example-email.com.

Note: Country, industry, or registrar issuance restrictions or limitations related to certain top-level domains (TLDs) can impact

your ability to purchase certain domains. For example, .org or .edu.

Choose the domain registrar you want to use. In this example we use Hover.com as the domain registrar.

Note: Some domain registrars have limitations regarding the types of domain names that can be purchased or have limitations

in the settings associated with your purchased domain name.

Important: Any information you provide to your domain registrar could be made public. WHOIS privacy generally protects your

information from public view, but could be subject to change in the future. You are solely responsible for the data you provide to

the third-party domain registrar.

Best Practices

•

Use the simplest, best branding to represent your company when naming your domain. For instance, your company name is Example

and your domain name is example.com. Ideally, use a subdomain under example.com for your Sender Authentication Package

domain or Authenticated Private Domain, such as em.example.com or e.example.com. If both subdomains are in use, consider using

a prefix like mail, email, mm, or info.

•

Avoid choosing a domain or subdomain that contains words or terms that don’t represent your company brand, such as Salesforce

or sf.

•

Use only top-level domain (TLD) names such as .com instead of using either .org, or newer TLDs such as .online.

•

Renew your domain name before it expires. Renewal can be annual or on a longer term use contract. Not renewing your domain

name before its expiration can result in poor email deliverability and broken images and links.

1. Purchase and Configure Your Domain Name

1. Go to the website for the domain registrar that you chose. For example, go to http://www.hover.com.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

2. Search to determine if your preferred domain name is available to purchase. For example, on hover.com, use the landing page search

bar to check domain availability.

3. If your domain name is available, you’re ready to go. If not, domain registrars sometimes can suggest close alternatives as hover.com

does.

4. When your preferred domain name is ready to purchase, put it in your shopping cart and head to the checkout.

Note: It’s not required to purchase additional Email options that appear at checkout, such as adding a large storage mailbox.

5. Complete checkout.

6. Open the registrar account for the domain that you want to use.

7. To name your servers, find the naming option.

On hover.com, the option is Nameservers.

8. Edit the server name. Add and rename servers until there are four that follow this naming convention.

a. ns1.exacttarget.com

b. ns2.exacttarget.com

c. ns3.exacttarget.com

d. ns4.exacttarget.com

9. Save your named servers.

Note: The configuration process can vary depending on the domain registrar that you use.

Contact Salesforce when your domain name is registered and your DNS server names are updated. If you intend to use the domain for

an SAP setup, complete the SAP form. If you intend to use the domain as a private domain for sending, reply to the private domain email.

If you’re unsure how to proceed, contact Salesforce Customer Support.

Auto-Suppression Lists

Assign a suppression list for use across an entire Marketing Cloud Engagement tenant or for specific business units for specific send

classifications. You can assign auto-suppression lists at different levels of your account. Suppression lists filter out email addresses and

prevent those addresses from receiving Email Studio messages. Suppression lists serve as a do-not-contact list for your email sends.

Auto-suppression lists typically include addresses with a history of spam complaints, unsubscribe lists from previous providers or

advertisers, addresses of your competitors, and canceled customers.

Note: Enabling this feature republishes the suppression list changes for the triggered send. Triggered send content isn’t updated.

Clear your triggered send queues before enabling. Subscribers in a triggered send queue when this feature is enabled aren’t

auto-suppressed. The auto-suppression isn’t applied to the send already in the queue.

Fields on auto-suppression lists are similar to attributes on a regular list. However, you can't use fields for personalization or segmenting.

Fields on suppression lists serve as informational data for you and other users of Marketing Cloud. When you create an auto-suppression

list, the system generates default fields.

•

Email Address

•

Date Added

Add as many fields as necessary.

Note: Auto-Suppression lists created in a child Business Unit impacts only the child BU. Auto-Suppression lists created in an

Enterprise BU impacts the whole account.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create an Auto-Suppression List

To automatically prevent sends to selected contacts, create an auto-suppression list in Email Studio.

Edit an Auto-Suppression List

Edit an existing auto-suppression list in Email Studio to change any applicable properties and update the associated triggered sends.

Enabling this feature republishes the suppression list changes for the triggered send. Triggered send content isn’t updated. Clear

your triggered send queues before enabling. Subscribers in a triggered send queue when this feature is enabled aren’t auto-suppressed.

The auto-suppression isn’t applied to the send already in the queue.

Add Subscribers to an Auto-Suppression List

To prevent extra subscribers from receiving triggered sends, add them to an auto-suppression list in Email Studio.

Turn Off Auto-Suppression Lists for an Account

To include all subscribers in triggered sends, you can turn off auto-suppression lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Create an Auto-Suppression List

To automatically prevent sends to selected contacts, create an auto-suppression list in Email Studio.

Note: Enabling this feature republishes the suppression list changes for the triggered send. Triggered send content isn’t updated.

Clear your triggered send queues before enabling. Subscribers in a triggered send queue when this feature is enabled aren’t

auto-suppressed. The auto-suppression isn’t applied to the send already in the queue.

1. In Email Studio, click Admin.

2. Click Auto-Suppression Configuration under Send Management.

3. Click Create.

4. Give the list a name and description in the Properties section.

5. Complete the Attributes section.

This section displays the attributes used in your auto-suppression list. This section displays default attributes. Add other values as

necessary.

6. Complete sender profiles in the Assignment Section.

a. Click Select.

b. Select each sender profile that is assigned the auto-suppression list. Search by sender profile name or business unit name.

c. Click Select.

7. Complete a CAN-SPAM classification in the Assignment Section.

a. Select a classification type of Commercial, Transactional, or Both.

b. If you have an Enterprise account, assign the suppression list to the enterprise level and every business unit in the enterprise.

This assignment includes business units you create in the future, or to specific business units within an enterprise.

8. Click Save.

9. Enter the email address that receives a notification email. This notification email sends after all triggered sends assigned to this

auto-suppression lists update.

10. Click Update.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Edit an Auto-Suppression List

Edit an existing auto-suppression list in Email Studio to change any applicable properties and update the associated triggered sends.

Enabling this feature republishes the suppression list changes for the triggered send. Triggered send content isn’t updated. Clear your

triggered send queues before enabling. Subscribers in a triggered send queue when this feature is enabled aren’t auto-suppressed. The

auto-suppression isn’t applied to the send already in the queue.

1. In Email Studio, click Admin.

2. Under Send Management, click Auto-Suppression Configuration.

3. Choose the auto-suppression list to update.

4. Click Properties.

5. Edit the auto-suppression list.

6. Click Save.

7. Enter the email address that receives a notification email after all triggered sends assigned to this auto-suppression list are updated.

8. Click Update.

Add Subscribers to an Auto-Suppression List

To prevent extra subscribers from receiving triggered sends, add them to an auto-suppression list in Email Studio.

1. In Email Studio, click Admin.

2. Click Auto-Suppression Configuration under Send Management.

3. Select the auto-suppression list for the additional subscribers.

4. Click Create.

5. Fill out these fields.

The email address of the unsubscribed subscriberEmail Address

The date the subscriber joined the listDate Added

VariesAny other custom attributes you defined for this list

6. Click Save.

To add multiple subscribers at once, use an import activity in Automation Studio.

SEE ALSO:

Import Activity in Email Studio

Turn Off Auto-Suppression Lists for an Account

To include all subscribers in triggered sends, you can turn off auto-suppression lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

1. In Email Studio, click Admin.

2. Click Auto-Suppression Configuration under Send Management.

3. To select all auto-suppression lists, select the header row.

4. Click Delete.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

5. To disable this feature for your account, contact your account executive.

iOS Universal Link

The iOS Universal Link feature allows links in Email Studio messages to open directly into previously installed apps on iOS devices. This

process is also known as deep linking into an app. By default, links embedded in an email message open in a browser window. After

implementing this feature, you can specify the app and location to open on iOS devices.

To use iOS Universal Link, implement a Sender Authentication Package with an SSL certificate for click domain in your account and

modify your iOS app to accept the links that open the correct location and track clicks.

If you use a third party for deep-linking, you can be required to host your own DNS to implement DNS records for the third-party

integration. Refer to your deep-link vendor's integration documentation for details. For a new SAP setup, choose the self-hosting DNS

option. For an existing SAP setup with a delegated domain or subdomain, take over hosting DNS for that domain. If Marketing Cloud

Engagement purchased the domain, take over ownership of the domain, and then host DNS. To initiate this process, log a case with

support to request:

•

Domain ownership transfer + zone file to host DNS: Request an authorization code for the transfer of the domain to your registrar

and to have a zone file generated with the existing DNS records that you must implement.

•

To host DNS only: Request a copy of the zone file generated with all the DNS records that you must implement.

You can’t configure DNS for third-party iOS Universal Linking or Deep Linking solutions. If you aren’t sure whether your domain is

delegated or owned by Engagement, contact Salesforce Customer Support.

Workflow

An iOS app designed to work with the iOS Universal Link feature caches an association file containing links that redirect to specific apps.

After a recipient clicks a link in an email message, the iOS Mail app contacts the specified click server, which directs the Mail app to open

either a browser window or an iOS app location, depending on your specified location. Other iOS-based mail apps perform different

behaviors, depending on the configuration of that app. For example, the Gmail app opens links first in a Gmail-based view regardless

of settings. Gmail then provides an Open in Browser option.

This example displays a sample link for a user with the click.example.com click domain in an email message:

https://click.example.com/qs=hxdwbvpwueDMUFuWaNEhguEVdMLWCPTsutky0fdC

When a recipient clicks that link, iOS gives your app an NSUserActivity object with the webpageURL property containing the proper URL.

The app communicates with the click server via an HTTP GET request to get the appropriate 302 URL redirection to open either a browser

window or app URL.

Implement an iOS Universal Link for Email Studio

Use the iOS universal link feature to allow links in Email Studio messages to open directly into previously installed apps on iOS devices.

Implementing an iOS universal link requires purchasing a Sender Authentication Package and an SSL certificate for the click domain.

The iOS universal link requires an HTTPS connection to perform correctly. The AppID and click domain pair that you use must be

unique for active applications across all business units in the enterprise.

Test iOS Universal Link in Your Account

Follow these steps to test your iOS Universal Link implementation in Email Studio.

Exclude Links from iOS Universal Links

Create a tag that prevents iOS Universal Links from opening the link in your mobile app. Instead, this tag forces your mobile device

to open the link in a browser window.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Implement an iOS Universal Link for Email Studio

Use the iOS universal link feature to allow links in Email Studio messages to open directly into previously installed apps on iOS devices.

Implementing an iOS universal link requires purchasing a Sender Authentication Package and an SSL certificate for the click domain.

The iOS universal link requires an HTTPS connection to perform correctly. The AppID and click domain pair that you use must be unique

for active applications across all business units in the enterprise.

1. Modify your iOS application to accept universal link requests.

a. Add your branded click domain link entry to the com.apple.developer.associated-domains entitlement. Ensure that the entry

includes the applinks prefix.

For example, an entry for click.example.com looks like this: "applinks:click.example.com".

b. Use the webpageURL property on the NSUserActivity object provided by iOS to determine whether the click originates from the

click domain that Marketing Cloud Engagement uses.

The property appears like this wrapped URL:

https://click.example.com/?qs=hxdwbvpwueDMUFuWaNEhguEVdMLWCPTsutky0fd

c. Verify that the incoming URL is from Engagement by performing a GET call to unwrap the first URL.

d. If your emails are using Einstein Content Selection, add another GET call to unwrap the intermediate Einstein content selection

URL.

Example of an Einstein Content Selection intermediate URL:

https://ecs.us.sfmc-einstein.com/einstein/api/block/44644947...

e. After the URL is fully unwrapped, retrieve the URL’s destination.

f. To parse the logic from the unwrapped URL and navigate to the correct view in the app, call a method.

This pseudocode illustrates the steps for accepting a universal link request. This method accommodates wrapped URLs from Marketing

Cloud Engagement that can use the Einstein Content Selection app. It adds a redirect before reaching the original URL. The pseudocode

refers to a function called Networking.getUnwrapped(), which retrieves the final URL by issuing a GET request to the URL

and retrieving the value of its location header.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

public func application(_ application: UIApplication,

continue userActivity: NSUserActivity,

restorationHandler: @escaping ([Any]?) -> Void) -> Bool {

// Example: Double wrapped url

if let url = userActivity.webpageURL {

if url.absoluteString.contains("sfmc-einstein") {

Networking.getUnwrapped(url) { result in

switch result {

case .success(let singleUnwrappedURL):

// first unwrapped link; will need to be unwrapped again

Networking.getUnwrapped(singleUnwrappedURL) { result in

switch result {

case .success(let doubleUnwrappedURL):

// Final unwrapped link to be parsed by app

parseAndRedirect(with: doubleUnwrappedURL)

case .failure:

print("Failed to get 2nd unwrapped link")

}

case .failure:

print("Failed to get 1st unwrapped link")

}

return true

}

2. Configure the iOS universal link for Email Studio. These settings are used to deploy the apple-app-site-association (AASA) file to a

click domain.

a. In the Email Studio Admin section, under Deep Linking, enter your AppID. The AppID is your application’s alphanumeric teamID

followed by the bundleID.

b. To force a mobile web experience for profile and subscription centers, select Exclude Profile and Unsub Center.

c. Save the entry.

d. The order of entries affects the order of entries in the AASA file. To change the ordering, delete the entries and enter them in

the correct order.

Your first entry must be a test or staging application.

e. After it’s configured, your click domain serves an AASA file. The AASA is

https://click.{your-sap-domain}/.well-known/apple-app-site-association.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

{

"applinks": {

"apps": [],

"details": [

{

"appID": "ABC123EFG.com.staging.app",

"paths": [

"NOT /subscription_center.aspx*",

"NOT /profile_center.aspx*",

"NOT /unsub_center.aspx*",

"NOT /u/*",

"/*"

]

{

"appID": "HJK456LMN.com.production.app",

"paths": [

"NOT /subscription_center.aspx*",

"NOT /profile_center.aspx*",

"NOT /unsub_center.aspx*",

"NOT /u/*",

"/*"

]

}

]

}

SEE ALSO:

Exclude Links from iOS Universal Links

Test iOS Universal Link in Your Account

Follow these steps to test your iOS Universal Link implementation in Email Studio.

Before testing the feature, add the domain to the iOS application entitlement. Using the same click domain for development and

production versions does not allow differentiation between test data and production data.

1. To test the feature, send email messages using iOS Universal Links to development versions of your app.

2. For all versions of your app to use the feature, include all applicable AppID values in your association file. If you only use a single

AppID value, include that value only in local builds of your app for testing purposes.

3. Ensure that you use SSL certificates for all sandbox or testing accounts for the Marketing Cloud.

Exclude Links from iOS Universal Links

Create a tag that prevents iOS Universal Links from opening the link in your mobile app. Instead, this tag forces your mobile device to

open the link in a browser window.

1. Open the HTML version of the email message containing the link.

2. Add mc-deep-link="false" to the <a> tag of the link, like this example:

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

3. Save the email message.

Android Deep Link Setup

Follow these steps to enable Android's deep-linking in Setup.

You can access Android asset link setup in Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can upload an assetlinks.json file to meet the Trusted

Domain requirements for Web Intent Resolution. Any URL in the email that isn't registered with a trusted domain resolves to the mobile

browser instead of the mobile app.

Note: Don't duplicate the same assetlinks.json file in Engagement that is already hosted on other domains. With Google digital

asset link specification you can reference your existing assetlinks.json file on your private domain.

1. From Setup, navigate to Platform Tools>Feature Settings>Email Studio>Deep-Linking Applications.

2. To upload your assestlinks.json file, Click Browse.

3. Save your work.

4. View your assetlinks.json file hosted at your click domain URL by visiting the Endpoint. Use the copy icon and paste the URL directly

into your browser.

5. If you make changes, use the dropdown menu to replace or delete the file.

Note: Allow 10 minutes for the file to deploy to your endpoint.

BrandBuilder

BrandBuilder allows you to customize the color scheme used within your Email Studio account. Use BrandBuilder to select color schemes

that match your company’s logo. You can use the color scheme when you design your email template to help maintain brand integrity.

Based on the colors of the logo you upload, BrandBuilder provides you with several pre-designed color schemes. After you choose how

to privately label your account, BrandBuilder applies the color scheme, providing your users with a branded experience.

Note: This page provides information about BrandBuilder in Email Studio. To change brands associated with Marketing Cloud

Engagement, follow the Marketing Cloud Engagement BrandBuilder documentation.

Prerequisites

Salesforce must enable this feature and create a brand for your account, including every business unit in an Enterprise 2.0 account.

Contact your Engagement account representative to accomplish these tasks before following these directions.

•

Upload a logo in JPG or GIF format.

•

Logos must measure 550 pixels wide by 60 pixels high.

•

Follow the same steps whether you’re creating a brand or modifying an existing brand. When you modify an existing brand, you

overwrite it with new color data. If you created a custom color scheme for the brand, the custom scheme doesn’t appear as an option

when you set up BrandBuilder for Email Studio.

BrandBuilder

The color scheme you choose applies to these elements.

•

Logo and header background color on every screen

•

Primary navigation buttons

•

The appearance of the login screen

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Survey landing page

•

Forward to a Friend landing page

•

Profile Center and Subscription Center pages

Scenario

Northern Trail Outfitters wants to create a color scheme based on their logo. They open the BrandBuilder page by clicking Admin and

selecting BrandBuilder.

They click start now and upload a logo.

They click Next, and the application auto-generates seven different branding schemes.

Northern Trail Outfitters chooses the color scheme they prefer and clicks Next. The BrandBuilder workspace displays the chosen colors

and a preview of what a page would look like using that color scheme.

Northern Trail Outfitters adjusts these colors by clicking the color box and choosing a new color in the color palette. After they select

their color scheme, they click Next. BrandBuilder displays previews of the Application Screen and the Logon Screen. They click Next

again.

The BrandBuilder generates the new color scheme while the status is displayed in a dialog box. After the dialog box disappears, Northern

Trail Outfitters clicks Finish and applies the brand to the application.

Create a New Brand

Create a BrandBuilder brand for Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Upload Your Logo

Follow these steps to upload a logo for BrandBuilder in Email Studio.

Choose Your Brand Color Scheme

Select a color scheme for BrandBuilder in Email Studio that displays within your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.

Preview Your Brand

The Preview Your Brand page in BrandBuilder shows your Marketing Cloud Engagement app and login page side-by-side. To preview

your brand, follow these steps in Email Studio.

Associate Your Brand

The Associate Your Brand page in BrandBuilder lists the subaccounts associated with your Marketing Cloud Engagement administrative

account. To associate your brand, follow these steps in Email Studio after you create a brand.

Rename a Brand

Your brand name appears as the browser tab name when you're using Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can change that name

in Email Studio.

Revert Your Brand to the Default

When you create a brand in Email Studio for BrandBuilder, you can revert to the default at any time. Contact your account executive

to begin the process.

SEE ALSO:

Profile Center for Marketing Cloud Engagement

Preview the Subscription Center

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a New Brand

Create a BrandBuilder brand for Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

1. In Marketing Cloud Engagement Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter BrandBuilder, and then select BrandBuilder.

2. Click New Brand.

3. Enter a brand name, and save your changes.

Upload Your Logo

Follow these steps to upload a logo for BrandBuilder in Email Studio.

Create a new brand before following these steps.

1. Click Choose File.

2. Use the file selection dialog box to locate the logo for this brand on your computer.

3. Click Upload Logo.

4. Click Next.

The Choose Your Color Scheme page appears in the workspace.

Choose Your Brand Color Scheme

Select a color scheme for BrandBuilder in Email Studio that displays within your Marketing Cloud Engagement account.

Engagement uses the color of the top-left pixel in your logo and displays it in the Header Color field. BrandBuilder uses this color to build

seven color scheme choices. Follow these steps to change the header color and build a new set of color schemes.

1. To bring up the color picker, click the Header Color text box.

If you know the hex code for the color, enter that code in the Header Color text box and click Get Schemes to rebuild the available

color schemes.

2. Click a color from the palette on Web Palette.

3. Click a color from the palette on Named Colors, which displays the name of the color that you pick.

4. Click the Custom Colors tab and manually adjust the Red, Green, and Blue values of the color until you build the color you want.

5. Click OK in the Color Picker dialog box.

6. To rebuild the available color schemes, click Get Schemes.

7. Select a color scheme.

To design your own color scheme, click Build Your Own to highlight it.

8. Click Next.

9. Adjust colors as desired.

You can enter either the hex code for the color or click the color button next to the element and choose from the palette.

10. To update the preview, click Regenerate Preview.

11. To preview how your changes affect the displayed screen, click Application Screen and Logon Screen under Preview.

12. After you complete your changes, click Next.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Preview Your Brand

The Preview Your Brand page in BrandBuilder shows your Marketing Cloud Engagement app and login page side-by-side. To preview

your brand, follow these steps in Email Studio.

1. To see a full-screen preview of your brand, click Preview Brand.

2. Click OK in the countdown dialog box to return to BrandBuilder.

3. When satisfied with your brand, click Next.

The application now builds your brand. When done, it displays the Associate Your Brand page.

Associate Your Brand

The Associate Your Brand page in BrandBuilder lists the subaccounts associated with your Marketing Cloud Engagement administrative

account. To associate your brand, follow these steps in Email Studio after you create a brand.

1. Select each account to which you want to apply this brand.

2. Click Finish.

When users log in to the accounts associated with this brand, they see the new color scheme. The first time users log in, they see

the standard Engagement login page unless they go directly to your branded URL. However, when they log in, they see the branded

application page. The next time they log in from the same machine, they see the branded login page.

Rename a Brand

Your brand name appears as the browser tab name when you're using Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can change that name in

Email Studio.

1. In the navigation pane, click Admin.

2. Click the BrandBuilder folder to expand it and view your private labels.

3. Right-click the brand that you want to rename and choose Rename.

4. Type the new name over the previous name and press Enter.

Revert Your Brand to the Default

When you create a brand in Email Studio for BrandBuilder, you can revert to the default at any time. Contact your account executive to

begin the process.

Subject and Preheader Validation

This feature displays a notification to the user to highlight words in the Subject and Preheader of emails prior to sending. The notification

warns users and prevents accidental live sends that contain test-related words in the subject and preheader.

The notification displays when sending an email during creation, using Send Flow to send an existing email and in the Send Email Activity

in Automation Studio. The default validation list includes the words Test, Draft, and Proof. You can configure the list for your situation

or language.

Dynamic subject and dynamic preheader is also validated prior to sending.

If your account is provisioned with Approvals, the subject and preheader of the email will not be editable when sending. These fields

need to be updated when the email is in draft status.

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The administrator must have the Subject/Preheader Validation permission under Send Management in the Admin section of Email

enabled to update the validation list. The maximum character limit is 4,000 and non-ASCII characters are unsupported. A warning displays

to the user if validation words are surrounded by these characters in their subject or preheader:

•

]

•

(

•

)

•

;

•

Users are not warned if validation words are surrounded by these characters in the subject or preheader of the email:

•

{

•

}

We recommend users use Subject Prefix in the Test Send step, which appends [Test]: to the beginning of the subject of the email at the

time of the test send. This function eliminates the need to include this directly in the subject of the email. You can customize the Subject

Prefix field can be customized.

Example: A Northern Trail Outfitters administrator wants to prevent marketers from sending emails with their test-related words

in the subject and preheader of emails. Marketers can use the Subject Prefix field in the Preview and Test step so they do not

modify the subject during testing. However, the administrator understands that marketers may also update the subject or preheader

as well so they want to add more prevention measures. Northern Trail Outfitters frequently use the word “Test” in their actual

subject lines, so they do not want the warnings to display for that word. In Setup, search Subject/Preheader Validation.

They click the trash can icon next to the Test field, and click Add to enter Pending as a new word in the list. They click Save.

A Northern Trail Outfitters marketer plans to send their monthly email newsletter. During the testing process, the marketer adds

Pending to the subject of the email, so the internal team can differentiate the test emails with the live emails. The marketer finalizes

the content of the email and now it is time to send the email. From the Preview and Test step in Create Email, the marketer selects

Save and Send. A pop-up notification displays to let them know they have a word “Pending” that is listed in the Validation list. If

the marketer chooses to ignore this warning and proceeds to send the email, from the Define Properties step to the Select Audience

step, another warning displays.

The marketer chooses to ignore this warning again and clicks Continue Send in the notification. In the final Review and Send

step, an icon displays in the preview to warn the marketer that the subject or preheader contains a word on the validation list. The

marketer had three opportunities to update the subject or preheader to ensure that live sends are not sent with test-related words.

In any of these scenarios, the marketer can update the subject to remove Pending from the subject line, and they can proceed

through the process without receiving a warning.

SEE ALSO:

Subscriber Preview and Test Send

Email Studio AdminEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a UI Extension

Follow these steps to create a UI extension in Email Studio. The UI extension lets you create a custom tab within the user interface that

displays the content of a different page. Users can click that tab to view the page within the context of the Marketing Cloud Engagement

user interface.

Note: For information about enabling this feature for your account, contact your Engagement account executive.

1. Click Admin > UI Extension > Custom Tab > Create.

2. Fill out the name, external key, description, and URL fields.

•

Name: The name of the tab. This name appears on the tab in the user interface.

•

External Key: An identifier for the tab you're creating. For example, if the tab's name is Policy, an appropriate external key would

be policy.

•

Description: A short description of the information that the tab displays.

•

URL: The URL of the landing page or website to view tracking for.

3. Click Save.

A new tab displays when you access the user interface.

Create a Custom Tab

To enable a landing page of job-level tracking information, create a custom tab to display a link on your Email Studio tracking screen.

For more information about enabling this feature, contact your Marketing Cloud Engagement account representative.

1. Click Admin.

2. Click Tracking Configuration.

3. Click Custom Tab.

4. Click Create.

5. Enter a name, external key, description, and URL.

•

Name: The name of the tab. This name appears on the tab in my tracking.

•

External Key: An identifier for the tab you're creating. For example, if the tab's name is Additional Opens, an appropriate

external key is additional_opens.

•

Description: A short description of what the tab displays

•

URL: The URL of the landing page or website to view tracking for

6. Click Save. The next time you log in, a new tab shows tracking data for an email send.

Content

Create content for your emails, and send your emails use Email Studio content creation tools. Create reusable content blocks, including

text, HTML, images, buttons, dynamic content, and A/B testing, to ensure that relevant messaging reaches the right person every time.

Design for the mobile inbox with mobile-optimized email templates. Preview what your email looks like on a mobile device or desktop

with instant rendering tools.

Manage and Edit Messages

Manage and edit content for the Content Builder messages you create in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Send an Email

Send an email from Email Studio using the most applicable method for your use case.

Personalization Strings in Marketing Cloud Engagement

A personalization string lets you insert subscriber attributes, such as subscriber name, into your emails. Personalization strings can

appear in the subject line, preheader, or in the content of the email. You may hear personalization strings referred to as merge fields

or substitution strings.

Content Detective

Content Detective is an Email Studio tool that helps you identify spam triggers in your email content. This feature mirrors the logic

used by spam-filtering software to identify words, phrases, and patterns that are likely to trigger filters and then recommends a

resolution to each identified problem. After running Content Detective, edit the triggers identified in the email using the recommend

resolutions.

Content Syndication

Use Email Studio content syndication to bypass typing in the email and include content in your emails directly from an outside

source.

Headers and Footers

Marketing Cloud Engagement can add text and images to the beginning and end of your email messages that ensures compliance

with CAN-SPAM regulations.

Social Forward

Social Forward in Email Studio enables email recipients to share content from emails with other users via their preferred social

network. Choose the sections of the email to enable with Social Forward and the networks represented by links and images in the

email. Social Forward also tracks any clicks from an email to a social network and the resulting page views from the URL shared by

the email recipient.

Email Attachments

Use Email Studio to send email attachments that aren’t included in the main body of an email. The recipient can open and save the

attachment independently of the email message.

Classic Content Retirement

Email Studio Classic Content was retired during the Marketing Cloud Engagement Spring ’23 release. To create and edit emails and

templates, use Content Builder, which includes functionality not available in Classic Content. Content Builder tools are also more

secure and flexible.

Manage and Edit Messages

Manage and edit content for the Content Builder messages you create in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Content Builder

Use Content Builder to consolidate images, documents, and content in a single location for use in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Content Builder includes the content repository (CMS) and API, the content management application (formerly referred to as Content

Canvas), and the new HTML content editor (formerly referred to as Content Builder).

Content Builder

Use Content Builder to consolidate images, documents, and content in a single location for use in Marketing Cloud Engagement. Content

Builder includes the content repository (CMS) and API, the content management application (formerly referred to as Content Canvas),

and the new HTML content editor (formerly referred to as Content Builder).

•

Get Started with Content Builder

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Editor Best Practices and Tips

•

Upload Files

•

Create Emails

•

Create Templates

•

Create Mobile Messages

•

Create Content Blocks

•

Create a Code Snippet

•

Share Content

•

Duplicate Content

•

Content Builder Approvals

•

Content Builder Tags

•

Sitecore Content

Send an Email

Send an email from Email Studio using the most applicable method for your use case.

DescriptionSending Method

Send Flow replaces Guided Send for Content Builder emails. Send

Flow guides you through the necessary steps to send your email.

Send Flow

Subscriber Preview is a rendering of an email as it’s viewed by a

recipient. After the initial subscriber preview, you can proceed

Subscriber Preview and Test Send

through the rest of the recipients to see previews for each

subscriber and send a test.

Send Preview is a rendering of an email as it’s sent to a recipient.

After the initial preview, you can proceed through the rest of the

recipients on the list to see the preview for each.

Perform Send Preview

Simple Send is a quick way to send your email with limited sending

options.

Perform a Simple Send

User-Initiated Send to send your email as part of an Automation

Studio automation.

Send a User Initiated Email Interaction

Triggered Send sends an email in response to a subscribers action.Triggered Emails in Email Studio

What Happens When You Click Send

Learn about the series of processes that take place before your email reaches your subscriber's inbox.

Do Not Track Email Opens and Clicks

At send time, in accounts without Do Not Track, Marketing Cloud Engagement tracking IDs are applied while rendering subscriber

messages. The Do Not Track functionality adds a send-time check that honors a subscriber’s preference. For subscribers who don’t

want to be tracked, the check suppresses Engagement tracking IDs from being applied to the rendered message. So, open and click

events aren’t known.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Send Flow

Send Flow replaces Guided Send for Content Builder emails in Email Studio. Send Flow allows you to see what you are sending to

reduce errors, and consolidates all major sending functionality into a simple, highly visual interface.

Use Subscriber Preview

To preview a microsite landing page as a subscriber in Email Studio, open the landing page and use Subscriber Preview.

Subscriber Preview and Test Send

Subscriber Preview and Test in Email Studio is a rendering of an email as viewed by a recipient. After the initial subscriber preview,

consider proceeding through the rest of the recipients to see previews for each subscriber. The preview feature doesn’t display in a

particular operating system or email client.

Perform a Simple Send

Follow these steps to perform a simple send in Email Studio.

Perform Send Preview

Perform a send preview in Email Studio to generate a preview of the email and send a test.

Email Delivery Checklist

Before you send an email in Email Studio, follow this checklist to ensure that the email meets your standards before it arrives in

subscribers' inbox.

Subscriber De-Duplication on Sends

De-duplication is a process Email Studio uses to remove duplicate instances of the same subscriber on a send. Our system does

removal either automatically or requires configuration from the user, depending on the audience type used in the sent.

Configure Send Throttling

Send sends emails every day during the hours that you specify starting the day that you send the email until all emails are sent. Use

send throttling to limit the number of emails sent to a particular domain or to control inbound website traffic caused by increased

interest. High inbound traffic can result in server crashes due to too many people visiting.

Considerations for Send Throttling

Keep in mind these advantages and limitations when you use send throttling.

Pending Sends and Past Sends

Use Pending Sends in Email Studio to view scheduled and in-progress email sends. Use Past Sends to view email send history.

What Happens When You Click Send

Learn about the series of processes that take place before your email reaches your subscriber's inbox.

When you send an email, a series of processes takes place behind the scenes before your email reaches your subscriber's inbox. The

send process usually happens in a matter of seconds, but sometimes, depending on the size of the send, it can take minutes to hours.

This guide briefly describes the Outbound Mail Management (OMM) process. Though you cannot control OMM, knowing what occurs

can help you understand why your send executes immediately or takes longer than normal.

The process described here is the typical scenario and can vary depending on the type of send you perform. The system handles thousands,

sometimes millions, of sends at any given time. This process describes the send experience for one email send.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

You Click Send

You can use a guided, simple, test, or triggered send.

OMM Analyzes the Email

First, OMM recognizes a send is coming and prepares databases for the job. OMM analyzes the job by determining if the email is

template-based or HTML-paste. Then OMM determines the subscriber source (a list, group, or data extension), and whether the send

contains personalization or dynamic content. This stage does not create the email but only prepares the databases.

OMM Builds the Email Structure

OMM now builds the structure of the email. The structure usually involves a header, footer, and body. If the email is template-based, the

template is included in this step. Then OMM retrieves the subject line, the body content, any AMPscript in the email, and interprets the

AMPscript and retrieves images.

OMM Analyzes the Subscribers

At this point, the email structure is in place, but OMM runs the content against the subscriber list. If your email send contains personalization

or dynamic content, it is during this process that OMM determines the appropriate content for each subscriber. This process only serves

as a placeholder until OMM builds the email in the next step.

OMM Builds and Sends the Email

By this stage, OMM has set the plans for the entire send. It knows all the subscribers associated with the send, the content being sent,

and which subscribers are receiving which pieces of content. Now OMM begins bundling the emails in batches of 500 and sending

them to the subscribers' inboxes. This stage can take longer than a few seconds. Sends containing thousands or millions of subscribers

with complex dynamic content rules can experience delays before arriving in your subscribers' inboxes.

Do Not Track Email Opens and Clicks

At send time, in accounts without Do Not Track, Marketing Cloud Engagement tracking IDs are applied while rendering subscriber

messages. The Do Not Track functionality adds a send-time check that honors a subscriber’s preference. For subscribers who don’t want

to be tracked, the check suppresses Engagement tracking IDs from being applied to the rendered message. So, open and click events

aren’t known.

Enable Do Not Track by selecting the DoNotTrack subscriber preference on the subscriber’s properties in Email Studio. In Contact Builder,

change the contact attribute to False in Email Demographics on the contact’s properties.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Note: Subscriber messages sent before Do Not Track is enabled have tracking IDs. Open and click events are processed and

logged. Also, existing open and click data can still be used in reporting and extracts.

Configuration

•

Add a Do Not Track attribute on page 26 with a default value.

•

Enable the attribute on each subscriber who doesn’t want to be tracked by modifying the subscriber’s data on page 99 or importing

the subscriber data on page 94. After the attribute is set, you can't overwrite a subscriber’s DoNotTrack settings with an import. You

can only update the setting through the application, preference center, and API calls. When importing, set the DoNotTrack value to

1 or true to indicate that the subscriber doesn’t want to be tracked. Set the value to null, 0, or false to indicate they’re tracked.

•

Modify triggered send requests and sendable audiences. A subscriber who passes through a triggered send request is created as a

new subscriber. A subscriber who is found in a sendable data extension is also created as a new subscriber. In these cases, the

DoNotTrack preference is honored, if provided. To support this functionality for new subscribers in your sendable sources:

–

Add a DoNotTrack column to your sendable data extensions. And set each subscriber row with a value of 1 or true to indicate

that they don’t want to be tracked. A value of null, 0, or false indicates they’re tracked. Any new subscriber found at send time

is added, and the DoNotTrack value is added to the subscriber’s properties.

–

Add a DoNotTrack attribute to the subscriber in your triggered sends. Republish all related triggered sends. While processing

the request, all new subscribers found are added to the system and the DoNotTrack value persists to the subscriber’s properties.

Note: Enabling or disabling Do Not Track is managed on the subscriber’s properties, not through a sendable data extension

or triggered send request.

Example:

<CustomerKey>MyTriggeredSend</CustomerKey>

</TriggeredSendDefinition>

<EmailAddress>[email protected]</EmailAddress>

<SubscriberKey>[email protected]</SubscriberKey>

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

<Name>DoNotTrack</Name>

</Attributes>

</Subscribers>

</Objects>

Configure a Preference Attribute for Do Not Track Email Opens and Clicks

Configure a DoNotTrack preference attribute to store subscriber’s preferences to not track email opens and clicks.

Configure a Preference Attribute for Do Not Track Email Opens and Clicks

Configure a DoNotTrack preference attribute to store subscriber’s preferences to not track email opens and clicks.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click Preference Management.

3. Click Create.

4. Name the new preference attribute DoNotTrack.

Make sure that you follow the naming convention of initial caps and no spaces for the attribute name.

5. Define the properties for this attribute.

When the default value is set to No, email opens and clicks are tracked by default. To suppress email tracking opens and clicks for

subscribers, set the default value to Yes.

6. Click OK.

SEE ALSO:

Profile and Preference Attributes in Email Studio

Attribute Properties in Marketing Cloud

Send Flow

Send Flow replaces Guided Send for Content Builder emails in Email Studio. Send Flow allows you to see what you are sending to reduce

errors, and consolidates all major sending functionality into a simple, highly visual interface.

Launch Send Flow

Use Send Flow to send Content Builder emails in Email Studio.

Define Properties

Define Properties in Email Studio’s Send Flow allows you to preview the email you selected.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Select Audience

The Email Studio root subscriber folders represent different audience types such as lists, groups, and more. Select a folder to view

the individual audience items. There are rules governing the types of audiences that can be targeted, excluded, and suppressed in

email sends. At least one audience must be targeted before you can proceed. Advanced Options allows you to include exclusion

scripts, domain exclusions, and more advanced options.

Configure Delivery

In Email Studio Send Flow, use Configure Delivery to set the timing of your sends and configure delivery options. Some options may

not be enabled in your account.

Review Send

Review and Send in Email Studio’s Send Flow allows you to see configurations previously made and confirm that all information is

correct and ready to send.

Audience Rules

When you add audiences in Email Studio’s Send Flow to the targeted, excluded, and suppressed areas, not all combinations are

valid, and you receive an error message if there’s a conflict with one or more audience types. These rules describe which combinations

are permitted and which are invalid.

Launch Send Flow

Use Send Flow to send Content Builder emails in Email Studio.

1. Click Send from the Content Builder grid.

2. Click Send from an email.

3. Click Save and Send in the Send Flow.

Define Properties

Define Properties in Email Studio’s Send Flow allows you to preview the email you selected.

By default, the Subject and Preheader are inherited and saved from the selected email. The addition of or edits made to the subject or

preheader here only applies for this send. To update what is displayed by default, edit the email. The subject and preheader can’t be

edited when Approvals is enabled. To update the field, edit the actual email. The subject and preheader of shared Content Builder emails

can’t be edited.

The From Options are defaulted to the Default Commercial Send Classification for the account. However, you can select from either

saved verified send classifications or use account-related From and Reply names.

The maximum length of a subject line is 200 characters and is required. A Preheader isn’t required.

Select Audience

The Email Studio root subscriber folders represent different audience types such as lists, groups, and more. Select a folder to view the

individual audience items. There are rules governing the types of audiences that can be targeted, excluded, and suppressed in email

sends. At least one audience must be targeted before you can proceed. Advanced Options allows you to include exclusion scripts, domain

exclusions, and more advanced options.

Audiences

The audience types displayed in your account can be different depending on the features enabled.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Note: To view Audience Builder audiences, you must have permission to view audiences. You can only send emails to data

extensions that were created in Audience Builder. Data extensions created elsewhere can’t be mixed with Audience Builder data

extensions.

Marketing Cloud Connect: Send to Sales and Service Cloud Reports, Campaigns, and Data Extensions

Marketing Cloud Connect users can send to Sales and Service Cloud campaigns, reports, and data extensions using the same interface.

These audiences appear in their own category of folders in Select Audience. The audiences from other clouds don’t display.

Send to Multiple Data Extensions

When enabled in your account, this feature allows you to send to multiple data extensions. Contact your relationship manager to enable

this feature.

Send to All Subscribers

When enabled in your account, this feature allows you to send to all subscribers.

CC and BCC

When enabled in your account, carbon copy or blind carbon copy recipients to an email send who aren’t members of the targeted

audience. You’re charged for each CC and BCC email sent.

Enter plain text email addresses, personalization strings, or AMPscript for CC and BCC. This feature works differently based on the type

of CC or BCC value you enter:

•

If you enter plain text email addresses, each email address copies to every email sent to the targeted audience. For example, if you

send to a targeted audience that contains 1,000 subscribers, 1,000 emails are sent to each CC and BCC recipient, in addition to the

1,000 emails sent to the targeted subscribers. For example, if a send goes out to 1,000 subscribers, with 1 CCed email address, 2,000

emails of your subscription would be used.

•

If you enter personalization strings or AMPscript, email addresses are copied on emails to subscribers to which the personalization

strings or AMPscript resolves. For example, if your CC value is %%AccountOwnerEmail%% then the email address found in the

AccountOwnerEmail field for each targeted subscriber are copied to that subscriber's email. If no value is found for the targeted

subscriber, then the email isn’t CCed for that subscriber.

Using personalization strings or AMPscript impacts sending speed. Sends require more time to process when personalization strings or

AMPscript is used. The length of the delay increases with the number and complexity of AMPscript functions and personalization strings

used for CC and BCC.

The email sent to a CC or BCC email address is identical in every way to the email sent to the targeted subscriber. CCed and BCCed

recipients receive the exact same email that the associated subscriber receives.

The system doesn’t create a subscriber for CC or BCC email addresses. All tracking activity performed by a CC or BCC recipient relates

back to the targeted subscriber. Emails sent to CC and BCC recipients aren’t included in Total Sent or Total Delivered numbers in tracking.

Opens and clicks track back to the subscriber key of the targeted subscriber. For example, if I send to [email protected], and CC

[email protected] and the email is opened by [email protected], tracking shows an open for the [email protected] subscriber.

There isn’t a note of the [email protected] subscriber.

Note: If CC or BCC recipients unsubscribe, it unsubscribes the actual subscriber.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Audience Counts

The counts for total targeted, total excluded, and total suppressed represent the total number of rows found within the selected

audiences in Email Studio.

SEE ALSO:

Publication Lists in Email Studio

Audience Counts

The counts for total targeted, total excluded, and total suppressed represent the total number of rows found within the selected audiences

in Email Studio.

The counts don’t match exclusions or suppressions against the targeted audience. These counts also don’t take subscriber statuses, such

as unsubscribed, held, and bounced, into consideration. Finally, the counts don’t check auto-suppressions, exclusions scripts, domain

suppressions, or domain exclusion lists. Counts for data filters, Salesforce Campaigns, Salesforce Reports, and Salesforce Data Extensions

can’t be retrieved.

Configure Delivery

In Email Studio Send Flow, use Configure Delivery to set the timing of your sends and configure delivery options. Some options may not

be enabled in your account.

Send Timing

Email sends immediately after you review the email.Send Immediately

Email sends on the selected date and time. The system uses the

time zone configured for the user scheduling the send. For example,

Schedule

if you schedule a send for 7:30 AM and your time zone is configured

for PST, the send deploys at 7:30 AM PST.

Send Throttling

Use Send Throttling to set an hourly throttle limit without a window, a throttle window without an hourly limit, or an hourly limit with

a time window.

Note: When a send throttle window is configured before a daylight savings change, the throttle window can start or stop one

hour later than intended.

Select a range of hours when you want to send an email and a

start and end time.

Delivery Window

You can specify how many emails an hour you want to send during

that time. Select a threshold between 500 and 5,000,000.

Hourly Threshold

Tracking

Track Clicks

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Select to suppress tracking data from reports and Email Studio

Overview. Send results are sent to the Test Send Emails folder in

Email Studio Tracking.

Suppress From Send Report

Set to My Tracking by default.Tracking Destination Folder

Select to enable send logging for this send.Send Logging

Send the results of your email sends in Marketing Cloud

Engagement to Sales Cloud.

Send Tracking Results to Sales Cloud

Use Additional Info to include email-level data for Web Analytics

in the links of the email.

Additional Info

Advanced Options

The system sends HTML and text versions, including the text version

you created. The version accepted by the subscriber’s email client

is delivered.

Multipart MME

Select to include Inbox Monitor deliverability seed list in this send.

The Send to Deliverability Seed List is available to accounts using

Inbox Tool through the Return Path integration.

Send to Deliverability Seed List

Prebuild Burst Sending

When enabled in your account, Prebuild Burst Sending allows you to send emails fast. The audience is locked down and the emails

are built when the schedule send time is set. Use this feature for flash sales or emergency messaging.

Prebuild Burst Sending

When enabled in your account, Prebuild Burst Sending allows you to send emails fast. The audience is locked down and the emails are

built when the schedule send time is set. Use this feature for flash sales or emergency messaging.

Example: On Wednesday, you set the scheduled send time to send a flash sale email on Friday morning at 9 AM. The system

immediately begins building the emails for the audience and stores the emails until send time. Then, on Friday morning at 9 AM

the emails are sent fast because the system built the email and compiled the audience on Wednesday.

Review Send

Review and Send in Email Studio’s Send Flow allows you to see configurations previously made and confirm that all information is correct

and ready to send.

1. Hover over any blue text to view more information.

2. Review the email configuration and accept the confirmation message.

3. To send the email immediately, click Send. To send the email based on your send configuration, click Schedule.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Audience Rules

When you add audiences in Email Studio’s Send Flow to the targeted, excluded, and suppressed areas, not all combinations are valid,

and you receive an error message if there’s a conflict with one or more audience types. These rules describe which combinations are

permitted and which are invalid.

Targeted

•

Lists and Groups

–

Any number of lists and groups can be targeted.

–

Lists and groups can be targeted together.

•

Data Extensions

–

Any number of data extensions can be targeted.

–

If data extensions are targeted, they’re the only audience type that can be targeted. You can't also target a list, group, filter, or

other audience type.

•

Data Filters

–

Only one data filter can be targeted.

–

The data filter can’t be combined with another audience.

•

Suppression Lists

–

Suppression Lists can’t be targeted.

•

Audience Builder Audiences and Shared Audience Builder Audiences

–

Any number of audiences can be targeted.

–

Shared and non-shared audiences can be combined.

–

If Audience Builder audiences are targeted, they’re the only audience type that can be targeted. You can't also target a list, group,

filter, or other audience type.

•

Salesforce Data Extension

–

Only one Salesforce Data Extension can be targeted.

–

If one Salesforce Data Extension is targeted, it can’t be combined with any other audience.

•

Salesforce Campaign

–

Only one Salesforce Campaign can be targeted.

–

If one Salesforce Campaign is targeted, it can’t be combined with any other audience, except for a Salesforce Report.

•

Salesforce Report

–

Any number of Salesforce Reports can be targeted.

–

If a Salesforce Report is targeted, one Salesforce Campaign can also be targeted.

–

A Salesforce Report can’t be targeted with any other audience type, except a Salesforce Campaign.

–

The same rules apply for shared versions of each audience type, such as Shared Data Extensions.

Excluded

•

Any number of any audience type can be excluded, except Data Filters and Suppression Lists.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Data Filters can’t be used as an exclusion.

•

Subscribers that appear in both the Target and the Excluded areas are excluded from the send.

Suppressed

•

Only Suppression Lists and Shared Suppression Lists can be suppressed.

•

Only one Suppression List or Shared Suppression List can be suppressed per send.

•

Subscribers that appear in both the target and the suppressed are excluded from the send.

Difference Between Excluded and Suppressed

At the time of send, exclusions and suppressions are treated the same, they’re removed from the final audience receiving the email. The

difference is how they’re treated in the user interface.

•

Suppression Lists are their own entity in Marketing Cloud Engagement, with Suppression List and Shared Suppression List categories.

•

Exclusions can be any audience type except Data Filters.

This distinction creates a sense of permanence with suppression lists. If a subscriber is on a suppression list, that list only ever excludes

that subscriber from the send, whereas a subscriber can be a part of an audience for targeting or exclusion.

Use Subscriber Preview

To preview a microsite landing page as a subscriber in Email Studio, open the landing page and use Subscriber Preview.

1. Open the landing page to preview.

2. Click Subscriber Preview.

3. Select a list, group, or select Do not use subscriber data.

If you select a list or group, the subscribers in the list or group appear in the Select a Recipient field. If no recipients appear for a list

or group, the list or group is empty. If you select the checkbox, you can skip the next step.

4. Select a subscriber for which to preview the landing page.

5. Click Generate Preview.

Click the arrow buttons beside the recipient name to see the preview for the previous or next subscribers on the list. After you generate

the send preview, you can generate the Inbox Preview.

Subscriber Preview and Test Send

Subscriber Preview and Test in Email Studio is a rendering of an email as viewed by a recipient. After the initial subscriber preview,

consider proceeding through the rest of the recipients to see previews for each subscriber. The preview feature doesn’t display in a

particular operating system or email client.

To preview recipients for a data extension, the data extension must meet one of these criteria:

•

Contains an email address field type

•

Is linked to the subscriber table via the Subscriber ID

•

Is linked to the subscriber table via the Subscriber Key

After you select a subscriber, you can use Test Send to send the email. For example, send the email to your own inbox to view how the

email appears in your email client.

If you change the subscriber attributes in subscriber preview, unsubscribe from a test email that you send, or access the subscriber's

profile center and make changes, those changes permanently apply to that subscriber.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Tip: Create a test subscriber whose properties you can change as needed for previewing and testing links.

A test send counts as a send in the application and against the threshold you purchased. If the subscriber you select for the preview has

a status of unsubscribed, bounced, or held the generated preview doesn’t deliver any test send. If sending to a data extension, you don’t

see the status of that subscriber as that is kept at the All Subscribers level. The preview and test send appears to send, if that subscriber

is unsubscribed, bounced, or held at the All Subscribers level the send doesn’t occur. The All Subscribers level contains the default status

for data extensions. To see if the subscriber you chose is unsubscribed, search for the subscriber.

Perform a Subscriber Preview and Test Send

Follow these steps to perform a subscriber preview and test send in Email Studio.

Litmus Email Previews in Content Builder

When you use Content Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can preview emails across 90+ browsers, devices, and clients.

Configure in Litmus which browsers, devices, and clients you want to preview. Access Litmus on the Preview and Test screen of the

Content Builder editor.

Perform a Subscriber Preview and Test Send

Follow these steps to perform a subscriber preview and test send in Email Studio.

Before you begin this procedure, your account must contain these items:

•

The email to preview

•

A subscriber with attributes or a data extension with subscriber data

Note: Content Builder test sends aren’t recorded on the Send Log data extension.

1. Select Preview and Test.

2. To view the email with AMPscript and personalization strings rendered select a list, group, data extension, or audience then select

a subscriber.

3. To ensure personalization displays correctly, review the email. The subscriber’s attributes are listed next to the preview.

Click .

Note: To view the email without AMPscript and personalization strings rendered, complete the Test Send section without

selecting a subscriber in the Subscriber Preview tab. To view an email with AMPscript and personalization strings rendered,

complete the Subscriber Preview section before completing the Test Send section.

5. Enter up to five email addresses to send a test email to in Recipient. If needed, select a test data extension and send a test email to

all subscribers within the data extension.

Note: When subscribers are selected in Subscriber Preview and Attributes, and multiple recipients are entered in the Test

Send step, the first recipient is added as the To Address and the remaining recipient addresses are BCCed. The To Address

listed in the email delivered to the remaining recipients is the first recipient's email address.

6. If needed, click Change to select a different personalization option and how recipients receive each version of the email. Complete

the Subscriber Preview step before using some of these features:

•

Based on <subscriber> - The test email renders personalization based on the single subscriber selected in the Subscriber Preview

step. One test send goes out to your recipient with the selected subscriber's personalization.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Based on <list or data extension> - The test email renders personalization based on the entire list or data extension selected in

the Subscriber Preview step. For example, if your list contains 20 subscribers then 20 personalized email versions are sent to

each recipient.

•

Based on <recipient test data extension> - The test email sends to each subscriber in the selected recipient test data extension.

The email renders based on the recipient's data.

7. Complete the From Options section.

8. Click Send Test.

9. Review the Test Send Summary to ensure the correct recipients receive the emails message and the correct number of emails send:

•

Warning Threshold - A notification displays when a test send exceeds the recommended test send threshold. To perform the

test send, click the check box.

•

Maximum Threshold - A notification displays when a test send exceeds the maximum test send threshold. You can’t bypass this

notification to perform the test send. Select different recipients or a different personalization send option.

10. Click Confirm and Send.

Litmus Email Previews in Content Builder

When you use Content Builder in Marketing Cloud Engagement, you can preview emails across 90+ browsers, devices, and clients.

Configure in Litmus which browsers, devices, and clients you want to preview. Access Litmus on the Preview and Test screen of the

Content Builder editor.

Litmus’ Instant API is used to display previews within the email creation flow. With this integration, you can easily create, preview, and

test Content Builder emails across multiple email clients.

Access Litmus Email Previews in Content Builder

To preview Marketing Cloud Engagement emails with Litmus, you must have a Litmus Pro or Enterprise account and Advanced

Preview permissions.

Litmus Email Previews Frequently Asked Questions

Review frequently asked questions about Litmus Email Previews for Content Builder.

Access Litmus Email Previews in Content Builder

To preview Marketing Cloud Engagement emails with Litmus, you must have a Litmus Pro or Enterprise account and Advanced Preview

permissions.

1. From an email, go to the Preview and Test tab.

2. Click the Litmus icon, and sign in to Litmus.

If you don’t have a Litmus account, you can sign up for a free trial.

3. To display the default header and footer in an email, select a subscriber to preview the message as that recipient.

4. To view the email rendered in a different inbox, click a preview thumbnail.

After you authenticate the connection between Email Studio and Litmus, you retain access until one of the following occurs.

•

You clear your Engagement cache.

•

You sign out of the Litmus account.

•

You remove the Engagement integration from your Litmus account.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Litmus Email Previews Frequently Asked Questions

Review frequently asked questions about Litmus Email Previews for Content Builder.

What Litmus Plan Is Required to Access the Integration?

Only Litmus Enterprise accounts can access this integration. Free Litmus Demo accounts do not work with this feature. If you don’t

have a Litmus account, sign up for a Litmus Enterprise free trial access for seven days through the integration.

How Does This Work with Different Users?

Litmus authenticates each user’s Litmus credentials. Multiple users using a shared Litmus account can’t view the previews unless

they sign in with their Litmus user credentials.

What If a Preview Takes a Long Time to Load or Displays an Error?

Previews can take anywhere from 2-10 seconds to load and a thumbnail spinner is displayed. When a specific client preview takes

a long time to load, refresh the page or try again later.

What If I Have Multiple Business Units?

Switching between business units in Marketing Cloud Engagement doesn’t require logging in multiple times. Your authenticated

credentials are remembered and previews are displayed.

Can I Preview Email Personalization in Litmus?

Yes. Select a subscriber in Subscriber Preview and then select Litmus to preview how the selected subscriber’s personalization

renders across multiple clients. Only previews emailed to your Litmus address display in your Litmus account.

Can I Use Litmus Email Previews in Content Builder?

Yes. Litmus Email Previews are available everywhere that you use the Content Builder editor for emails.

What Litmus Plan Is Required to Access the Integration?

Only Litmus Enterprise accounts can access this integration. Free Litmus Demo accounts do not work with this feature. If you don’t have

a Litmus account, sign up for a Litmus Enterprise free trial access for seven days through the integration.

How Does This Work with Different Users?

Litmus authenticates each user’s Litmus credentials. Multiple users using a shared Litmus account can’t view the previews unless they

What If a Preview Takes a Long Time to Load or Displays an Error?

Previews can take anywhere from 2-10 seconds to load and a thumbnail spinner is displayed. When a specific client preview takes a long

time to load, refresh the page or try again later.

What If I Have Multiple Business Units?

Switching between business units in Marketing Cloud Engagement doesn’t require logging in multiple times. Your authenticated

credentials are remembered and previews are displayed.

Can I Preview Email Personalization in Litmus?

Yes. Select a subscriber in Subscriber Preview and then select Litmus to preview how the selected subscriber’s personalization renders

across multiple clients. Only previews emailed to your Litmus address display in your Litmus account.

Can I Use Litmus Email Previews in Content Builder?

Yes. Litmus Email Previews are available everywhere that you use the Content Builder editor for emails.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Perform a Simple Send

Follow these steps to perform a simple send in Email Studio.

1. Choose the checkbox next to the email to send.

2. Click Send.

3. Click Simple Send.

4. Fill out the form.

Note: Only verified email addresses display for accounts with domain verification send restrictions on.

5. Click Send.

6. To send the email, click Confirm Send.

To return to the form, click Cancel.

Perform Send Preview

Perform a send preview in Email Studio to generate a preview of the email and send a test.

Before you begin this procedure:

•

Create a subscriber with the desired attributes for which to preview the email

•

Have permission to send or to view tracking

If the subscriber you select for the preview has a status of Unsubscribed, the generated preview doesn’t deliver any test send. If the

subscriber you select for the preview has a status of Bounced or Held, you receive an error when trying to perform the test send.

If sending to a data extension, you don’t see the status of that subscriber as that is kept at the All Subscribers level. The send preview

test send appears to send, but the send doesn’t occur when the subscriber is unsubscribed at the All Subscribers level. That location

contains a data extension’s status by default. To see if the subscriber you chose is unsubscribed, search for the subscriber.

If a dynamic subject or dynamic preheader is set in the email, the text version sets the subject or preheader display in send preview.

1. Choose the checkbox next to the name of the email or click the name of the email.

2. Click Send Preview.

3. To preview the email, choose the subscriber.

4. Select a From Name.

5. Complete the header and footer section.

6. Click Generate Preview.

7. For Preview Mode, click Desktop View and Mobile View to view what the content looks like on a mobile or desktop device for

each subscriber.

8. Click Send Test Email.

9. Complete Preview Email. Enter one email address in the To field. If you have Cc functionality enabled in your account, you can copy

up to four email addresses. The Send button is only active when the email addresses are in the correct email address format. Every

email address receives the same email and is able to view the header.

10. Click Send.

SEE ALSO:

Search for a Subscriber

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Email Delivery Checklist

Before you send an email in Email Studio, follow this checklist to ensure that the email meets your standards before it arrives in subscribers'

inbox.

•

Review Email Deliverability to see strategies to ensure that your email reaches as many subscribers as possible.

•

Use Content Detective on page 45 on your email.

•

Preview and Modify Text Versions of your email.

•

Perform a Subscriber Preview and Test on your email.

Subscriber De-Duplication on Sends

De-duplication is a process Email Studio uses to remove duplicate instances of the same subscriber on a send. Our system does removal

either automatically or requires configuration from the user, depending on the audience type used in the sent.

Lists, groups, and data filters created from a list are always de-duplicated at the time of send by SubscriberID.

Data Extensions are de-duplicated by email address. By checking the appropriate box, the system removes the duplicate email address

from the send. If this option isn’t checked, the system tries to send an email for every row in targeted data extensions and data extension

data filter.

Note: Triggered email sends don’t have a de-duplication mechanism.

Configure Send Throttling

Send sends emails every day during the hours that you specify starting the day that you send the email until all emails are sent. Use send

throttling to limit the number of emails sent to a particular domain or to control inbound website traffic caused by increased interest.

High inbound traffic can result in server crashes due to too many people visiting.

1. In the app switcher, hover over your name, and then click Setup.

2. In the Quick Find box, enter Email Studio, and then select Email Optional Features.

3. Turn on send throttling.

Your email send job starts at the time you specify, but the send isn’t spread evenly between the start and end times. Instead, the email

is sent during the specified time range until the send is complete or your specified end time is reached. If the end time is reached before

the send is complete, the send continues the next day at the same start time and runs until the send is complete.

SEE ALSO:

Send Flow

Enable Email Optional Features

Considerations for Send Throttling

Keep in mind these advantages and limitations when you use send throttling.

•

When you republish and restart a triggered send, a new job is created with a fresh send throttle. For example, you have an hourly

rate of 10,000 sends. You republish and restart the triggered send after 10,000 sends, so another 10,000 are sent in that hour when

the new job starts.

•

The sending pauses if the hourly limit or the time window closes and schedules the job to resume when the throttle opens again.

•

Setting a throttle for a job doesn’t ensure that a certain number of emails are sent during a particular time period. A throttle is an

approximate target, not a guarantee of how many emails send during a time period. The actual number of sends can exceed or fall

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

below the hourly throttle limit by a few thousand based on factors such as system load, message complexity, and deliverability

issues.

•

When send definitions with a send throttle window that was configured before a daylight savings change are started after the time

change, the throttle window is scheduled to start and stop one hour later than intended.

•

If an email is queued for more than 72 hours, it doesn’t send.

Pending Sends and Past Sends

Use Pending Sends in Email Studio to view scheduled and in-progress email sends. Use Past Sends to view email send history.

Contact your relationship manager for information on enabling these features.

Pending Sends

Use Pending Sends to view your scheduled and in-progress sends and to cancel sends that haven't completed sending. The status

column displays the status for each scheduled or in-progress send.

If you cancel an in-progress send, the application shows you the number of subscribers sent to. If you would like to send to the remaining

subscribers, create an exclusion list of subscribers already sent to. The exclusion list can be used in a send to exclude subscribers who

have already received the email.

If you need to change an email in a scheduled send, cancel the send. A scheduled send is a snapshot of the email at the time of scheduling.

If you delete an email that is scheduled to send, the send still goes out on schedule. To see all pending sends, including scheduled sends

to a delete email, click Pending Sends without selecting an email. However, you can select a specific email by clicking Pending Sends

to view the scheduled and in-progress sends for that email.

Past Sends

Use past sends to view your send job history. Select an email then click Past Sends.

Content Builder Email Sends

For Content Builder emails, use the Pending tab on the Email Overview Sends section. From there, you can cancel the send.

Update a Job Link

Update Job Links allows you to edit links in completed or canceled sends in Email Studio Past Sends.

Pause and Resume a Send in Tracking

Pause a Content Builder email send in Email Studio Tracking to stop the system from processing and sending any further email

messages.

SEE ALSO:

Marketing Cloud Sends to Campaigns or Reports

Update a Job Link

Update Job Links allows you to edit links in completed or canceled sends in Email Studio Past Sends.

1. Click Content.

2. Click Emails.

3. Select the checkbox next to the email name.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

4. Click Past Sends.

5. Select the job ID for the send to update.

6. Click the Job Links tab.

7. To edit the link, click the URL ID.

8. Complete the URL field and preview the URL.

Note: In the URL field, enter the full URL path that includes https://. For example, if the link in your email is

https://cl.exct.net/?utm_medium=NorthernTrail, the URL is https://cl.exct.net//.

9. Complete the URL Parameters field and preview the URL.

Note: In the URL Parameters field, enter the value pairs that occur after the base URL. For example, if the link in your email is

https://cl.exct.net/?utm_medium=NorthernTrail, the parameter is utm_medium=NorthernTrail. Add and remove query string

parameters to the URL as needed, but you must edit each parameter separately.

10. To add a field and value pair, click Add Parameter.

11. Click Save.

12. Confirm by clicking Change Link. If validation errors occur, fix them and continue again at Step 7.

Pause and Resume a Send in Tracking

Pause a Content Builder email send in Email Studio Tracking to stop the system from processing and sending any further email messages.

A paused email stops the system from processing and sending any further email messages until you resume the send. Resume the send

at any time, or cancel the send to end the send process entirely and prevent any further emails from sending. You can’t change any

content for the email message when paused. This function only prevents additional sends from occurring until you resume the send.

Contact your relationship manager for information on enabling this feature.

1. Click Tracking.

2. Select Sends.

3. Click the checkbox next to the send or sends to pause.

4. Click Pause Send.

To restart a paused send, click the checkbox next to the appropriate sends and click Resume Sends.

SEE ALSO:

Tracking Workspace

Personalization Strings in Marketing Cloud Engagement

A personalization string lets you insert subscriber attributes, such as subscriber name, into your emails. Personalization strings can appear

in the subject line, preheader, or in the content of the email. You may hear personalization strings referred to as merge fields or substitution

strings.

In addition to the subscriber attributes, you can insert system data personalization strings. Addition system personalization strings are

available when building AMPscript expressions.

You can type personalization string into the HTML of your email body if you're creating an HTML paste email, or you can type them into

the text editor when you create or modify text content.

•

All personalization strings are case-insensitive.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Include the two sets of double percent symbols (two percent symbols on both sides of the personalization string).

•

If you're inserting a personalization string into a line with other data, include a space before and after the personalization string.

•

If you insert a personalization string, and the subscriber attribute isn't populated, the string will appear blank in the email. Define a

default value for every attribute you intend to use with a personalization string. For example, use this string to include default

attributes for First_Name: %%[IF Empty(First_Name) == "False" THEN SET @FN = First_Name ELSE

SET @FN = "Customer" ENDIF]%%Hi %%=v(@FN)=%%

•

Do not include personally identifiable information, such as email address, in email links.

Personalization Strings in Email Studio

These tables include available personalization strings for use in Email Studio.

Insert Personalization Strings

Insert personalization strings in Email Studio content or content from other apps.

SEE ALSO:

Profile and Preference Attributes in Email Studio

Personalization Strings in Email Studio

These tables include available personalization strings for use in Email Studio.

Important: Don’t use a personalization string as a column name in a sendable data extension or profile attributes.

Email Data

If you include a date personalization string in your email, it appears in the email in US format. You can use AMPscript to change the

format as necessary.

DescriptionPersonalization String

Full name of the month in which the email is sent%%xtmonth%%

Current month as a number%%xtmonthnumeric%%

Current date of the month when the email was sent (for example,

22)

%%xtday%%

Current day of the week when the email was sent (for example,

Thursday)

%%xtdayofweek%%

Current year when the email was sent%%xtyear%%

Current date when the email was sent in short format. For example,

12/13/2010

%%xtshortdate%%

Current date when the email was sent in long format. For example,

Monday, December 13, 2010

%%xtlongdate%%

Descriptive name of a hyperlink, known as the link alias. This string

populates with the value of the link's alias or the complete URL if

%%linkname%%

no alias is specified at the link level. This personalization string is

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

only available in use with the web analytics connector. This string

allows a web analytic programs to identify web activity that initiated

from an individual link within the email. Link alias values generated

via personalization strings, AMPscript, or SSJS don’t reflect in the

%%linkname%% value.

Internal name of the email%%emailname_%%

Context in which the customer views the email. Resolves to these

values:

%%_messagecontext%%

•

SEND - Display the rendered final message for sending to

subscriber

•

PREVIEW - Display the send preview options available within

editor

•

VAWP - Display content

•

VIEWSENT - Display the non-subscriber link to preview content

•

FTAF - Display the rendered Forward To a Friend message

•

LANDINGPAGE - Display a landing page or microsite

•

VALIDATION - Display information corresponding to the

validate option in Marketing Cloud

•

LINKRESOLUTION - Display resolved dynamic script at click

time

•

SMS - Display SMS message content

•

SOCIAL - Display Social Forward content

•

SITE - Display CloudPages content

Resolves to Text or HTML according to the subscriber's email type

preference

%%_MessageTypePreference%%

The body of the email you sent. This personalization string is used

in triggered sends to place the body of an email into a reply email

%%_replycontent%%

Resolves to True if the email job is marked as a Test Send.

%%_IsTestSend%%

%%[

if _isTestSend == false then

... // this code doesn’t run for test sends

endif

]%%

Email send ID (the unique identifier associated with the send of

the email, for tracking data purposes)

%%jobid%%

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Any content with the assigned value for the Preheader attribute

of the email message

Assign the Preheader as a variable -

%%[

%%_PreHeader%%

set @preheader = [_preheader]

]%%

and then use it in the Preheader field -

%%=v(@preheader)=%%

Populates the preheader in an email from the brand tags.%%Email_Preheader%%

Inserts the double opt-in link in an email.%%double_opt_in_url%%

Data About the Recipient

Note: Don’t include personally identifiable information, such as email address, in email links.

DescriptionPersonalization String

Subscriber's email address%%emailaddr%%

Value for the subscriber's full name as entered in the profile

attribute Full Name.

%%fullname_%% or %%fullname%%

Value for the subscriber's first name as entered in the profile

attribute Full Name. This string pulls the value before the space.

%%firstname_%% or %%firstname%%

Value for the subscriber's last named as entered in the profile

attribute Full Name. This string pulls the value after the space.

%%lastname_%% or %%lastname%%

Value of the user-defined profile attribute for this subscriber%%comment_%% or %%comment%%

Subscriber ID (the unique identifier for this subscriber)%%subscriberid%%

The unique identifier for the subscriber, if you use the subscriber

key feature

%%_subscriberkey%%

Unique LINE-generated user ID. These IDs vary by provider.%%line_address_id%%

Unique job ID number for the LINE send event%%line_job_id%%

Unique identifier representing a subscriber for that particular LINE

Channel

%%line_subscriber_id%%

List ID%%listid%%

List ID followed by the type of email (HTML or text). For example:

11955_HTML

%%list_%%

The identification number associated with this subscriber's

membership on this particular list (This data is rarely used)

%%listsubid%%

The subscriber's text or HTML preference. Resolves to text or to

HTML.

%%_messagetypepreference%%

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionPersonalization String

Mobile number of the subscriber used as part of an SMS Interaction%%mobile_number%%

Short code associated with the response as part of an SMS

Interaction

%%short_code%%

The name the user gives to the list.%%_listname%%

The email ID assigned by the system.%%_emailid%%

The BatchID for the Batch containing the Subscriber who received

the send.

%%_JobSubscriberBatchID%%

This value captures any audience object sent to. This covers lists,

data extensions, groups, and filters.

%%_DataSourceName%%

Returns the active region ID or 0 if none is active.%%_ImpressionRegionID%%

Resolves to the currently active impression region or evaluates to

an empty string if no impression region has been set.

%%_ImpressionRegionName%%

Data About the Sender

DescriptionPersonalization String

Your reply name, as defined in your account settings%%replyname%%

Your reply email address%%replyemailaddress%%

Your account ID (MID)%%memberid%%

The data entered in the Address in Email Footer fields located in

your Account Information workspace.

%%member_busname%%

%%member_addr%%

If you're creating an email based on a standard template, this data

is included by default in the email footer.

%%member_city%%

%%member_state%%

%%member_postalcode%%

%%member_country%%

Standard Links

DescriptionPersonalization String

If you're creating an email based on a standard template, this link

is included by default in the email header.

%%view_email_url%%

Usually, you want to insert the Forward to a Friend graphic from

your Forward to a Friend folder rather than use this personalization

string.

%%ftaf_url%%

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionPersonalization String

If you're creating an email based on a standard template, this link

is included by default in the email footer.

%%subscription_center_url%%

If you're creating an email based on a standard template, this link

is included by default in the email footer.

%%profile_center_url%%

If you're creating an email based on a standard template, this link

is included by default in this email footer.

%%unsub_center_url%%

Microsites

DescriptionPersonalization String

You can enter this string value to reference a landing page. Replace

PageID with the ID value for the landing page.

%%microsite_base_url[default]PageID[/default]%%

Analytics

The areas to enter these strings in the application are only available if you have web analytics functionality enabled in your account. To

enable web analytics, contact your representative.

DescriptionPersonalization String

You can enter this string value in the Send Wizard as part of a

Guided Send when the analytic connector is enabled.

%%AdditionalInfo_%%

These values are set in the property of the email when the analytic

connector is enabled.

%%__AdditionalEmailAttribute1%%

%%__AdditionalEmailAttribute2%%

You can have up to five AdditionalEmailAttribute fields to enter

values.

%%__AdditionalEmailAttribute3%%

%%__AdditionalEmailAttribute4%%

These attributes aren’t available in emails created before enabling

more email attributes. Resave these emails to use these additional

attributes.

%%__AdditionalEmailAttribute5%%

Note: Existing email before AEM feature is enabled must be resaved to ensure addition email properties can be used.

Note: To ensure more email properties can be used, resave existing emails that use more email attributes

Insert Personalization Strings

Insert personalization strings in Email Studio content or content from other apps.

1. Open the content you want to insert a personalization string.

2. Place your cursor where you want the personalization string to appear.

3. Enter the personalization string using the toolbar or type in the personalization string.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Content Detective

Content Detective is an Email Studio tool that helps you identify spam triggers in your email content. This feature mirrors the logic used

by spam-filtering software to identify words, phrases, and patterns that are likely to trigger filters and then recommends a resolution to

each identified problem. After running Content Detective, edit the triggers identified in the email using the recommend resolutions.

Including just one potential trigger word or phrase will not greatly affect your email's deliverability. If Content Detective finds two or

more potential triggers, remove them to improve your subscribers' chances of receiving your email.

Trigger Words

This list includes trigger words that prompt a warning from Content Detective in Email Studio. This list is not complete and may

change without notice.

Run Content Detective on New Creation Tools

Follow these steps to run Content Detective on the new creation tools in Email Studio.

Trigger Words

This list includes trigger words that prompt a warning from Content Detective in Email Studio. This list is not complete and may change

without notice.

•

!!!

•

$$$

•

100% Free

•

Absolutely Free

•

Accept Credit Cards

•

act now! don't hesitate!

•

addresses on CD

•

Adult

•

all natural

•

amazing stuff

•

as seen on

•

avoid bankruptcy

•

bargain

•

big bucks

•

billion dollars

•

breakthrough

•

Bulk

•

buy direct

•

call free

•

call now

•

cancel at any time

•

cannot be considered spam

•

cash bonus

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Casino

•

click here

•

closeout

•

collect child support

•

compare rates

•

confidentially on all orders

•

Contest

•

contest

•

credit bureaus

•

Credit card

•

dear friend

•

dear somebody

•

Debt

•

dig up dirt on friends

•

direct marketing

•

Earn $

•

Earn Cash

•

enlarge

•

falling interest

•

Financial Freedom

•

font size=5

•

font size=6

•

font size=7

•

free consultation

•

Free Gift

•

free investment

•

free leads

•

Free Offer

•

free preview

•

free quote

•

free sample

•

free trial

•

free!

•

full refund

•

get paid

•

guarantee

•

H.R. 3113

•

Hardcore

•

hidden assets

•

Home Based

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Home Business

•

home refinancing

•

impotence

•

in accordance with laws

•

Increase Sales

•

Incredible Deal

•

inventory reduction

•

join millions of americans

•

last chance

•

limited time only

•

long distance

•

lose weight

•

low prices

•

lower interest

•

lower monthly payment

•

lowest prices

•

Make $

•

Million email addresses

•

Money at home

•

money back

•

Money fast

•

money making

•

mortgage network

•

Mortgage Rate

•

multi level marketing

•

Naughty

•

no cost

•

no experience needed

•

no gimmick

•

no investment

•

no obligation

•

no selling

•

no strings attached

•

Nude

•

off shore

•

once in a lifetime

•

one hundred percent free

•

one time mailing

•

online biz opportunity

•

online business opportunity

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

opt-out

•

order

•

order a report

•

order online

•

penis enlargement

•

pennies a day

•

percent off

•

please read

•

Porn

•

Pornography

•

Potential Earnings

•

promise you

•

purchase order

•

purchase today

•

pure profit

•

Read this twice

•

Read Twice

•

Reduce your interest rate

•

Refinance today

•

refinance your home

•

reverses aging

•

risk free

•

save

•

Save $

•

save an extra

•

save up to

•

score with babes

•

search engine listings

•

section 301

•

sent in compliance

•

serious cash

•

serious only

•

Sex

•

Slut

•

spam

•

stock alert

•

stock disclaimer statement

•

stock pick

•

stop snoring

•

this email was not sent unsolicited

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

this is an advertisement

•

this is not spam

•

to be removed from this list

•

toll free

•

UCE-Mail Act

•

university diploma

•

viagra

•

we honor all

•

we strongly oppose the use of spam email

•

while supplies last

•

while you sleep

•

why pay more?

•

you are a winner

•

you're a winner

Run Content Detective on New Creation Tools

Follow these steps to run Content Detective on the new creation tools in Email Studio.

Contact your account administrator if you would like access to this feature.

1. Click Content.

2. Select Content Detective next to the email to scan.

Content Detective scans your email and then displays a list of the potential triggers. If you made separate changes to the text version

of the email, Content Detective displays the text version results separately on this page. Buttons display at the bottom of the Content

Detective box when potential triggers are found:

•

Print: Print using the standard print dialog box.

•

Save: Save the results to a text file using the standard file download dialog box with the option to open or save the file.

3. Click Content to exit.

Content Syndication

Use Email Studio content syndication to bypass typing in the email and include content in your emails directly from an outside source.

You specify a path to the content in place of the content itself. The system gets the content at that path and includes it in your email.

For example, you can include the latest entry in your company blog in your email by specifying the path to the latest entry. The system

uses the path you entered to get the latest entry at the time of the email send and include it in your email.

Content syndication is designed to help you integrate your CMS or CRM system with emails. You can use content syndication to get

content from any web site or your CMS into the body of your emails. Also, you can use the content syndication features to notify your

system that an activity has completed. You can use content syndication through the application or by using the calls in the API. AMP

Web Services currently does not support content syndication.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Path Specification with a URL

You specify the path with a URL. The URL can be anything you can access with a web browser, such as a text file, HTML code, or CGI

script. As a result, you can call a function in the message’s middle and insert whatever the function returns into the message at the point

it was called.

You can make the URL subscriber specific by inserting a substitution string in the URL to act as a placeholder for the subscriber's attribute

value. You insert the attribute substitution string into the URL in square brackets, for example: [First Name], to indicate to replace the

substitution string with the subscriber attribute value. You can use this functionality to present different content based on the subscriber

attribute.

Best Practices with Content Syndication

For best results, encode internationalized web pages being retrieved using the HTTPGet functionality in the same character set as the

content type of the internationalized email.

Create Content Syndication

Learn to create content syndication in Email Studio.

System Performance Preservation

The process of pulling content from another system into an email involves HTTP calls from Marketing Cloud Engagement to your

content management system or web site.

Content Syndication in the API

Reference for information regarding Email Studio content syndication in the API.

Internationalized Web Pages

Content syndication in Email Studio can get content from web pages that use any of a broad range of character encoding, including

double-byte characters.

Create Content Syndication

Learn to create content syndication in Email Studio.

1. Select External Content from the Insert menu on the text editing screen. The Insert External Content window appears.

2. Enter the URL, including http://, of the external content that you want to populate in the content area. You can link to anything that

you could normally access via HTTP. You can click the personalization button to use personalization as part of the URL.

Note: Do not include personally identifiable information, such as email address, in email links.

3. Click when to retrieve the content:

•

Retrieve content immediately gets the content from the path you provided when you click OK. Use this feature to get the content

as it appears at the path right now. If you select this option, you cannot include personalization in the URL. You can edit and

preview the syndicated content in the regular HTML and text preview.

•

Retrieve content when email is sent retrieves the content at the time the email for sending is processed. Use this feature to get

the latest content at the path at the time the email is sent. If you choose this option, you can include personalization in the URL.

You cannot edit the content, but you can preview the content for a test subscriber.

4. If you select Retrieve content when email is sent, you must choose a Retrieval Option:

•

Subscriber level evaluates the content to include for each subscriber. If the content is cached, the system uses the cached content;

otherwise the system accesses the URL. Use this option if the path in the URL field contains a personalization string or if it triggers

a function that changes the content for different subscribers.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Email level accesses the URL once at the beginning of the email send and includes the content for each email. Use this option

to save processing time if the path in the URL field returns the same content for every email sent.

•

After (post-send) level accesses the URL after the email has been sent. This option does not include content in your email. Use

this option if the accessing the URL raises an event to perform a one-time programmatic action, such as logging the completion

of the send.

5. If you select Subscriber Level or Email Level, indicate what to do if the call returns empty content:

•

Continue allows the system to proceed as normal.

•

Stop the email send prevents the system from processing any more emails in the send and puts the send in an error status.

•

Skip the subscriber and continue email send is available only if you select Subscriber Level Retrieval. This option skips the

subscriber and proceeds to process the rest of the send as normal.

6. Click OK.

System Performance Preservation

The process of pulling content from another system into an email involves HTTP calls from Marketing Cloud Engagement to your content

management system or web site.

The send speed, response time, and overall reliability of the process depend on the state of several pieces of equipment involved in the

internet connection between Engagement and the content source. Consider these guidelines to preserve your system performance:

•

Make no more than three content syndication requests in an email.

•

Refrain from using personalization in the URL. Create variables for holding the values, reference these variables within the URL, and

use script to populate the variables. For example, https://example.com?n=%%=v(@personalizedParameter)=%%

•

If the syndicated content is the same for all subscribers in the campaign, save processing time by requesting the system get the

content at the beginning of the send (Before;HTTPGet) instead of separately for each subscriber. If the syndicated content is the

same for all subscribers in the campaign, the system caches the syndicated content it gets from the URL so it can be used again

without accessing the URL.

•

Save processing time by use HTTPGet to not track the URL.

•

Send to smaller lists or subsets of lists if you do have performance issue. Try to keep list sizes below 1,000 subscribers. For large lists,

contact your sales representative to identify a custom process that meets your needs.

Content Syndication in the API

Reference for information regarding Email Studio content syndication in the API.

HTTPGet Command

Purpose

Include in the body of the email to pull content at the specified URL into the email at the time the email is sent. If the content is cached,

the system includes the cached copy; otherwise, the system accesses the URL. Use this command to include subscriber-specific content

in each email in the campaign.

If the syndicated content is not specific to the subscriber, use the Before;HTTPGet command.

Syntax

%%httpget "URL"%%

Arguments

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

URL

Example: Calling a Script with HTTPGet

You have multiple ads on your web server, and you have a script that picks one randomly, so that each subscriber gets a randomly

selected ad.

The web site address is https://www.example.com. The filename of the script you've written to generate custom web pages is

getdata.pl, which uses the Email Studio attribute labeled Email Address to determine which page to display. You enter this code

in the email body at the point where the web page content appears:

%%httpget "https://www.example.com/cgi-bin/getdata.pl?id=[Email Address]"%%

When the email is generated, the application substitutes the subscriber's email address into the URL (for example:

https://www.example.com/cgibin/getdat...heirDomain.com). The content that appears in that location of the email body is the

web page specific to that subscriber's email address.

Although the HTTPGet merge tag doesn’t require specific output from the URL, we recommend including a standard HTTP/1.0

200 OK status line, a Content-Type: text/plain or Content-Type: text/html line followed by an empty line, and then the content of

the text to be inserted. For example, a Perl script would include code similar to the following:

print "HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n";

print "Content-Type: text/plain\r\n";

print "\r\n";

print "Welcome to the Northern Trail newsletter!";

This function works with HTTP on port 80 and HTTPS on port 443. Non-standard port assignments cause this function to fail.

HTTPGetWrap Command

Purpose

Include in the <a> tags of links in the syndicated content to track the links that appear in the content pulled into your emails with

HTTPGet or the TreatAsContent() AMPscript function.

Note: Only subscriber-level content syndication emails require the use of this command. All other emails using content syndication

automatically include the code necessary to track the links.

Syntax

<a href="httpgetwrap|URL">Click here</a>

Arguments

URL

Before;HTTPGet Command

Purpose

Include in the body of the email to pull content from the specified URL one time at the beginning of an email send to include in each

email in the campaign. Use this command to save time over HTTPGet when you don't need the content pulled separately for each

instance of the email. You can also use this command to obtain notification that an email send has begun. If the syndicated content is

specific to the subscriber, use the HTTPGet command instead of this command.

Syntax

%%before;httpget "URL"%%

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Arguments

URL

Example: Including the Same Ad in Each Email

You have multiple ads on your web server, but you want every subscriber in a particular email send to see the same ad. The web

site address is https://www.example.com, and the filename of the script that pulls the ad is getmailad.pl. Enter this code in the

email body at the point where the ad appears:

%%before;httpget "https://www.example.com/cgi-bin/getmailad.pl"%%

Example: Requesting Notification that an Email Send has Begun

You've written a script that records the start time of the email send. The web site address where the script is located is

https://www.example.com, and the filename of the script is recordevent.pl. You enter this code at the top of the email body:

%%before;httpget "https://www.example.com/cgi-bin/recordevent.pl"%%

The system runs your script at the time the email send is processed. This command does not cause content to be added to the

email body. The before;httpget command is processed outside of the subscriber context because it retrieves

content that is used in the email for all subscribers. Therefore, the only personalization that is valid in the URL query string is the

JobID substitution. For example:

%%before;httpget "https://www.example.com/cgibin/record....pl?id=[jobid]"%%

After;HTTPGet Command

Purpose

Include at the end of an email definition to perform an action one time at the end of an email campaign. This command does not include

content in the body of the email. Use this command to provide notification to your CRM or CMS system that the email send completed.

Note: This call cannot be used with triggered emails sends because the triggered email send job does not end after the message

is sent.

Syntax

%%after;httpget "URL"%%

Arguments

URL

Example: Requesting Notification that an Email Send has Completed

You've written a script that logs that an email send has been completed.

The web site address where the script is located is https://www.example.com and the filename of the script is logsentmessage.pl.

You enter the following code at the end of the email body:

%%after;httpget "https://www.example.com/cgi-bin/logsentmessage.pl"%%

The system runs your script at the conclusion of the email send. This command does not cause content to be added to the email

body.

The after;httpget command is processed outside of the subscriber context because it is invoked one time after the send to all

subscribers is complete. Therefore, the only personalization that is valid in the URL query string is the JobID substitution. For

example:

%%after;httpget "https://www.example.com/cgi-bin/logse...pl?jid=[jobid]"%%

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Empty Return Handling Options

The HTTPGET call can succeed without an error but return no content. By default, the system assumes that there is no syndicated content

relevant to the context of the email and continues the email send. You can override this default behavior with an optional flag.

Syntax

%%httpget[;EmptyReturnHandlingOption] "URL"%%

%%before;httpget[;EmptyReturnHandlingOption] "URL"%%

Valid Values

•

0 (or none) - continue normal processing

•

1 - stop processing and set job status to error

•

2 (for a subscriber-level call) - skip the subscriber and continue the send

•

2 (for a before-level call) - stop the send and set job status to error

This flag is ignored for the After;HTTPGet command.

Example: You have multiple ads on your web server, and you have a script that picks one randomly, so that each subscriber gets

a randomly selected ad. If the script does not return an ad, you want the system to skip that subscriber and continue with the rest

of the send.

The web site address is https://www.example.com, and the filename of the script is ad.pl, which is located in the cgi-binfolder.

You enter the following code in the email body at the point where the ad appears:

%%httpget ; 2 "https://www.example.com/cgi-bin/ad.pl"%%

Error Handling

The best defense against content syndication errors is a good offense. Using AMPscript, you can prevalidate values being used for content

syndication. If your page requires a query string value and errors if it doesn't receive it, you can check the value before the call occurring.

Potentially Dangerous

%%httpget "http://adomain.com/newsletter/album?...umId=[albumid]"%%

In this content syndication call, albumid is required to return any content. If it isn't part of the request, it returns a server error.

A Better Approach

%%[ if length(albumid) > 0 then ]%% %%httpget

"http://adomain.com/newsletter/album?...umId=[albumid]"%% %%[ endif ]%%

This approach uses Manuscript to validate the data before executing the content syndication call. It doesn’t prevent rogue web server

errors, but prevents data-related issues.

Internationalized Web Pages

Content syndication in Email Studio can get content from web pages that use any of a broad range of character encoding, including

double-byte characters.

For best results, use the same character encoding as the email that contains the content web sites from which you syndicate content.

If you selected the option to Retrieve content immediately, the email preview displays the content from the URL you specified. You can

edit this content within the email.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

If you selected to Retrieve content when email is sent, the email preview displays the command that gets the content from the URL you

specified. For example, if you specified the URL https://www.example.com/cgi-bin/getmailad.pl, you see this content area in your email

preview:

Note: If you syndicate content from a microsite or landing page that contains AMPscript, that AMPscript does not execute and

does not appear properly within the email.

Headers and Footers

Marketing Cloud Engagement can add text and images to the beginning and end of your email messages that ensures compliance with

CAN-SPAM regulations.

Set this information as part of the send classification or customize how those headers and footers appear at an account level. Select

whether email messages sent from this account include your choice of header and footer:

•

System-default header and footer

•

Custom header and footer specifically for that account

•

No header and footer at all

New customers with branded accounts use custom headers and footers without any system default information. Existing customers

can contact Salesforce Customer Support for assistance with configuring this setting.

Any email you send must include the following information, as represented by the following personalization strings:

Table 1: Headers and Footers Personalization Strings

Personalization StringElement

%%profile_center_url%%A link to any available profile center

%%unsub_center_url%%A link to any available unsubscription service

%%Member_Busname%%The name of your business

%%Member_Addr%%The physical street address of your business

%%Member_City%%The city location for your business

%%Member_State%%The state location for your business

%%Member_PostalCode%%The ZIP code for your business

%%Member_Country%%The country location for your business

Standard headers and footers already include this information. You can add this information to any custom headers you create. Manually

add this information to text-only email messages.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

To display headers and footers for custom templates, add <custom type="header" /> where you want the header to display

and <custom type="footer" /> where you want the footer to display.

You can configure your account to ignore this validation, but you remain responsible for including all legally required information in

your email messages. Use more personalization strings in your headers as necessary.

Enterprise, Enterprise 2.0, and Agency accounts must contact their account executive to enable this functionality for the account. Users

of the Salesforce Marketing Cloud Engagement Connector v2 can’t use the %%subscription_center_url%% personalization tag.

Using a custom version of header or footers overrides any locale preferences for the default headers and footers.

Accounts using integrations, such as Marketing Cloud Connect or Microsoft Dynamics CRM, returns to the system default header and

footer code when that account removes or upgrades its integration. This default occurs even when an account specifically overrides the

header and footer code. Ensure that you copy all relevant header and footer code and replace it in your account following the change

in integration.

Implement Header and Footer Rules

To use standard header and footer content with the content you create in Marketing Cloud Engagement, enable header and footer

rules.

Implement Header and Footer Rules

To use standard header and footer content with the content you create in Marketing Cloud Engagement, enable header and footer rules.

1. To insert standard header and footer information, including all legal requirements for a marketing email send, click System Default.

2. To insert header and footer information specific to that account, click Custom:

a. Insert HTML or text in the fields for Header and Footer.

b. To insert header and footer information specified by your account settings, click Insert Recommended Header.

3. To remove header and footer information for email messages sent from the account, click None.

4. Click Save.

Social Forward

Social Forward in Email Studio enables email recipients to share content from emails with other users via their preferred social network.

Choose the sections of the email to enable with Social Forward and the networks represented by links and images in the email. Social

Forward also tracks any clicks from an email to a social network and the resulting page views from the URL shared by the email recipient.

Social Forward creates a streamlined process for your subscribers to share content with their friends and contacts via social networks.

Determine the shared content and how that content appears in the social networks, allowing you to preserve your branding and promote

your message. Social Forward also allows you to specifically target certain social networks that better receive your message or information.

Social Forward supports direct linking to a specific social network or the use of a third-party service like ShareThis. Social Forward also

supports international networks. Images representing the social networks are stored in your Portfolio folder under a Social sub-folder.

These pictures can be altered or changed to your specifications.

Social Forward and Portfolio must be enabled on your account to use Social Forward. In addition, Social Forward uses AMPscript to

create the links used to share content with Social Forward.

The application creates the AMPscript for you, or you can manually add the AMPscript yourself. Therefore, be familiar with AMPscript to

manually add these links to your email. Contact your account executive for more information.

Note: The Facebook sharing functionality currently has image restrictions that may cause images to not load as intended. Facebook

recommends that the thumbnail's width and height must be at least 50 pixels and shouldn't exceed 130x110 pixels. The ratio of

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

both height divided by width and width divided by height (w/h, h/w) cannot exceed 3.0. For example, an image of 126x39 pixels

does not display, as the ratio of width divided by height is greater than 3.0 (126/39 = 3.23). Any image included in the shared

content that meets those requirements is likely to be pulled in as a sharable option. For more information, see Facebook's developer

page.

Note: The LinkedIn sharing functionality currently has image restrictions similar to Facebook's. For more information, see LinkedIn's

developer forum.

Social Forward uses links in the email to share predefined content areas, and you can use this function in different situations:

•

Sharing a Direct Link - Click an enclosed link in an email to share content with your contacts on your individual social networking

account. The social network requires you to log in and view a preview of the form to be shared on that network. You add any

comments or changes you want to make and submit the item, which posts it on your wall, bookmark list, or other shared forum.

•

Sharing a Content Listing - Click an enclosed link in an email to share content with your contacts on your individual social networking

account. On an intermediary page, you choose the link. The social network requires you to log in and view a preview of the form to

be shared on that network. You add any comments or changes you want to make and submit the item, which posts it on your wall,

bookmark list, or other shared forum.

•

Sharing Content via ShareThis - Click an enclosed link in an email to share content on ShareThis. Choose the social network from a

ShareThis widget on an intermediary page. ShareThis requires you to log in and view a preview of the form to be shared on that

network. You add any comments or changes you want to make and submit the item, which posts it on your wall, bookmark list, or

other shared forum.

Note: Using Social Forward with ShareThis requires some additional configuration.

•

Once the Content is Shared - After the content is shared on a social network, the content can be shared from contact to contact.

You can also provide the option for others to sign up for your email newsletter or add content to their accounts.

The application wraps shared content in tags that indicate which sections of the email are shared to social networks. Tags also designate

the link used to share the content to those social networks.

Social Forward Tags

Email Studio wraps shared content in tags that indicate which sections of the email are shared to social networks. Tags also designate

the link used to share the content to those social networks.

Share a Content Area using the Editor

Follow these steps to share a content area using Social Forward in Email Studio via the Editor.

Content Area Sharing using Paste HTML, AMPscript, and Social Markup

The HTML code in this example shares a dynamic piece of content from an Email Studio email to Facebook. The first commented

part of the pasted HTML names the content area Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML

contains the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function.

Content Area Sharing using Paste HTML and Social Markup

The HTML code in this example shares a static piece of content from an Email Studio email to Facebook. The first commented part

of the pasted HTML names the content area Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains

the creates the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function.

Email Sharing with Paste HTML Templates and Social Markup

The HTML code in this example creates an email in Email Studio with three separate content areas, each one defined by the

@@ContentArea lines. The first commented part of the HTML email names the email Shared content Region 1, and the second

commented part of the pasted HTML contains the creates the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript

function. In this case, the Social Markup link refers to the aggregator ShareThis.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Email Sharing with Paste HTML and Social Markup

The HTML code in this example shares the content of an email from Email Studio to Facebook. The first commented part of the

pasted HTML names the email Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains the Social

Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function. In this case, the Social Markup link refers to the aggregator

ShareThis.

Share a Content Area using the HTML Only View

Follow these steps to share a content area via Social Forward in Email Studio using the HTML Only view.

Track Social Forward Activities

Clicks from an email in Email Studio to either a social network or an aggregator like ShareThis display with the standard tracking

information. Use an Automation Studio query activity to view the raw data of how shared content is viewed and forwarded once

that content is already on a social network.

Paste HTML Email Share

Social Forward in Email Studio can share an entire email instead of sharing select content areas from a message. This functionality

uses a Paste HTML email in Email Studio.

Supported Social Networks

This list contains all social networks supported by Social Forward in Email Studio.

Social Content Slot Sharing via AMPscript in a Paste HTML Email

Creating an email in Email Studio by pasting HTML code into an email allows you a great deal of control over how your email appears

to your subscribers. That same control makes sharing social content slots via pasted HTML an effective tool in getting your content

onto social networks.

Social Content Slot Sharing in a Paste HTML Email

Creating an email in Email Studio by pasting HTML code into an email allows you a great deal of control over how your email appears

to your subscribers. That same control makes sharing social content slots via pasted HTML an effective tool in getting your content

onto social networks. You can create and place your shared social content slots and icons with great precision using the directions

provided below. You can also easily create multiple shared social content slots in one document. If your normal workflow included

using pasted HTML to create your emails, adding Social Forward markup should integrate easily into your process.

Content Areas and Social Forward Tags

Email Studio Social Forward tags wrap content areas to allow sharing via social networks.

Use Standard and Custom Icons to Share Content

Social Forward uses a default set of icons to represent the social networks supported within Email Studio. You can alter the appearence

of icons to call attention to a section, such as changing the size or color of the icon. You can also alter the icon to better fit the design

of your email. These steps allow you to change the icons used in Social Forward in a specific message without alterting the default

icons.

Create a Content Area for Each Social Network

Follow these steps to create a content area distributed via Social Forward in Email Studio for each social network.

Set Up the Dynamic Content Area

Follow these steps to set up the dynamic content area for sharing to different social networks in Email Studio.

Share Content to Different Social Networks Dynamically

Use preferences from a data extension or subscriber list to determine which social network icons appear in the email for use with

Social Forward in Email Studio. Using dynamic content in conjunction with Social Forward allows you to determine which subscribers

receive certain content and where they can share that content.

Change Default Social Network Icons

Follow these steps to change the default social network icons for Social Forward in Email Studio.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Apply a CSS File from Portfolio to Shared Content

When IDs receive multiple attributes from different style sheets or instances in the same style sheet, the resulting landing page may

not appear as you expected. For best results, create a dedicated style sheet that provides the CSS for the landing page. This step

prevents problems with cascading attributes from multiple style sheets.

CSS Files and Shared Content in Social Forward

Assigning a CSS file to your shared content allows you to better dictate how your content will appear on social networks. You can

specify how certain elements in your message will appear when shared using CSS, and storing the file in your Email Studio Portfolio

gives you a central location for managing the appearance of your content.

Sample Tracking Queries for Social Forward

These queries allow you to obtain tracking information, such as content impressions and shared content slots, regarding the

information you shared through the Social Forward function. Use these sample tracking queries below in your Automation Studio

query activities to obtain the specified information. View the information in the resulting data extension.

Social Forward Tags

Email Studio wraps shared content in tags that indicate which sections of the email are shared to social networks. Tags also designate

the link used to share the content to those social networks.

Share a Content Area using the Editor

Follow these steps to share a content area using Social Forward in Email Studio via the Editor.

1. Create your email content and choose the section or sections you want to share. You can paste in HTML, use AMPscript, or share

the contents of an entire email message.

2. Click Modify Content.

3. Click Edit and choose Social Properties.

4. In the Content Area Properties window that appears, choose the Allow Content To Be Shared checkbox and enter the information

for the Shared Content Slot, Title, and Description text fields. The Shared Content Slot field contains the ID and name for the shared

content.

5. Choose the CSS file to use in conjunction with the published content. This file applies to the content after it has been published to

a social network. You can use CSS to modify these elements:

•

Font families, and sizes

•

Headers, footers, and sidebars

•

Simple text injection (non-HTML)

•

Show, and hide DIV tags

•

Conditional logic

•

Inserting rich content or content from Portfolio

•

Adding links to the page

6. Click OK to close out the Content Area Properties window.

7. Click the Insert menu then ch oose Social Forward.

8. In the Insert Social Forward window that appears, choose the checkboxes next to the links for the social networks to include in your

email content area. You can also choose the checkbox at the top of the screen to add all social networks displayed in the window.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

9. If the social network requires additional information or parameters, click that network and add the information in the text field directly

below the social networks list. For example, you can enter the ShareThis Account ID by clicking the ShareThis entry and adding the

ID number in the ShareThis Account ID text field that appears in the window.

10. Select the content area to associate with these networks from the Associate with Shared Content Slot dropdown menu. You may

also manually type in the name of a shared content slot to create later.

11. Click OK to close the Insert Social Forward window and insert the appropriate icons into the content area.

12. Click a social network icon to bring up the Image Properties window. In Link Properties, you can alter the following properties for

the social networking link:

•

The location of the link by type and URL

•

Whether or not the link is a conversion tracking link

•

The link tooltip

•

The link's tracking alias

13. Click OK to accept your changes and close the Image Properties window.

Content Area Sharing using Paste HTML, AMPscript, and Social Markup

The HTML code in this example shares a dynamic piece of content from an Email Studio email to Facebook. The first commented part

of the pasted HTML names the content area Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains

the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function.

Example: The AMPscript inside of the table refers to a data extension called Offers, and it pulls the content for each subscriber

based on the subscriber key contained in the CustomerID column of the Offers data extensions. The content shared by the subscriber

remains the static content and doesn't change, no matter who opens the shared content.

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"Shared content region 1",

title:"First shared email content",

description:"This is the first test of ExactTarget's social forwarding",

csskey:"portfolio css 1"] -->

<table width="100%" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" border="0" bordercolor="" cellpadding="5"

cellspacing="0">

<tr>

%%[ var @row, @rows, @cnt

set @rows = LookupRows("Offers","CustomerID",_subscriberkey)

for (var @cnt = 0 to RowCount(@rows)) do

]%%

%%=Field("Description",Row(@rows,@cnt))=%%

%%[ next @cnt ]%%

<a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','Shared content region

1')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook"

title="Publish to Facebook">

<img

src="http://image.exct.net/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

alt="Facebook"

title="Facebook"

border="0">

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

</a>

</td>

</tr>

</table>

Content Area Sharing using Paste HTML and Social Markup

The HTML code in this example shares a static piece of content from an Email Studio email to Facebook. The first commented part of

the pasted HTML names the content area Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains the

creates the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function.

Example:

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"Shared content region 1",

title:"First shared email content",

description:"This is an example of shared content",

csskey:"portfolio css 1"] -->

<table width="100%" bgcolor="#FFFFFF" border="0" bordercolor="" cellpadding="5"

cellspacing="0">

<tr>

<img src="https://example.com/images/logo.jpg"

title="logo" align="left" border="0" />

This is an example of a shared content area!  Please feel free to

pass on this information!<br />

<a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook', 'US', 'Shared content region

1')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook"

title="Publish to Facebook">

<img

src="http://image.exct.net/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

alt="Facebook"

title="Facebook"

border="0">

</a>

</td>

</tr>

</table>

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Email Sharing with Paste HTML Templates and Social Markup

The HTML code in this example creates an email in Email Studio with three separate content areas, each one defined by the @@ContentArea

lines. The first commented part of the HTML email names the email Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the

pasted HTML contains the creates the Social Markup link using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function. In this case, the

Social Markup link refers to the aggregator ShareThis.

Example:

<html>

<head>

</head>

<body>

<table>

<tr>

<td>

To view this email as a web page, click <a href=

"%%view_email_url%%">here.</a>

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"Shared content region 1",

title:"email",

description:"The monthly hot offers newsletter for Company

X.",

csskey:"companyx"] -->

<tr>

<td>This is a great newsletter!!!<br />

<a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','Shared content

region 1','_stid','publisherID')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to ShareThis - email"

title="Publish to ShareThis">

<img

src="http://image.exct.net/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

alt="ShareThis"

title="ShareThis" border="0" /> ShareThis</a> using Facebook, email and

more.

</td>

</tr>

</table>

<table cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" width="600" id="Table5" border=

"0">

<tr>

<td><font face="verdana" size="1" color="#444444">This email was

sent to: %%emailaddr%%<br />

<br />

<b>Email Sent By:</b> %%Member_Busname%%<br />

%%Member_Addr%% %%Member_City%%, %%Member_State%%,

%%Member_PostalCode%%, %%Member_Country%%<br />

</tr>

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

</table>

</td>

</tr>

</table>

</body>

</html>

Email Sharing with Paste HTML and Social Markup

The HTML code in this example shares the content of an email from Email Studio to Facebook. The first commented part of the pasted

HTML names the email Shared content Region 1, and the second commented part of the pasted HTML contains the Social Markup link

using the GetSocialPublishURLByName() AMPscript function. In this case, the Social Markup link refers to the aggregator ShareThis.

Example:

<html>

<head>

</head>

<body>

<table>

<tr>

<td>

To view this email as a web page, click <a href=

"%%view_email_url%%">here.</a>

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"Shared content region 1",

title:"email",

description:"The monthly hot offers newsletter for Company

X.",

csskey:"companyx"] -->

<tr>

<td>This is a great newsletter!!!<br />

<a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','Shared content

region 1','_stid','publisherID')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to ShareThis - email"

title="Publish to ShareThis">

<img

src="http://image.exct.net/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

alt="ShareThis"

title="ShareThis" border="0" /> ShareThis</a> using Facebook, email and

more.

</td>

</tr>

</table>

<table cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" width="600" id="Table5" border=

"0">

<tr>

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

<td><font face="verdana" size="1" color="#444444">This email was

sent to: %%emailaddr%%<br />

<br />

<b>Email Sent By:</b> %%Member_Busname%%<br />

%%Member_Addr%% %%Member_City%%, %%Member_State%%,

%%Member_PostalCode%%, %%Member_Country%%<br />

</tr>

</table>

</td>

</tr>

</table>

</body>

</html>

Share a Content Area using the HTML Only View

Follow these steps to share a content area via Social Forward in Email Studio using the HTML Only view.

1. Create your email content in the HTML view of Email Studio.

2. Click Insert on the menu bar and choose Social Forward Area.

3. In the Content Area Properties window that appears, choose the Allow Content To Be Shared checkbox and enter the information

for the Shared Content Slot, Title, and Description text fields. The Shared Content Slot field contains the ID for the shared content,

and you can use whatever name you wish.

4. Choose the CSS file to use in conjunction with the published content. This file applies to the content after it has been published to

a social network.

5. Click OK. Email Studio adds HTML tags to the content area that you can use to mark your shared content area.

6. Click Insert on the menu bar and choose Social Forward Links.

7. In the Insert Social Forward window that appears, choose the checkboxes next to the links for the social networks to include in your

email content area. You can also choose a checkbox to add all social networks displayed in the window.

8. If the social network requires additional information or parameters, click that network and add the information in the text field directly

below the social networks list. For example, you can enter the ShareThis Account ID by choosing the ShareThis entry and adding

the ID number in the ShareThis Account ID text field that appears in the window.

9. Click OK to insert the social network links you selected.

Track Social Forward Activities

Clicks from an email in Email Studio to either a social network or an aggregator like ShareThis display with the standard tracking information.

Use an Automation Studio query activity to view the raw data of how shared content is viewed and forwarded once that content is

already on a social network.

Paste HTML Email Share

Social Forward in Email Studio can share an entire email instead of sharing select content areas from a message. This functionality uses

a Paste HTML email in Email Studio.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Shared Content Definition

HTML in the email message requires comment tags to share the content:

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"SharePasteHTML", title:"Sharing an entire Paste HTML

email", description:"Sharing an entire email to Facebook and LinkedIn"] -->

The entire Paste HTML email code follows the RegionStart tag.

The RegionStart statement belongs after the table which contains the link for viewing the email as a webpage and before the HTML for

the footer information at the bottom of the email.

Social Networks Definition

This example displays sample code for sharing to Facebook and LinkedIn:

<a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','SharePasteHTML')=%%" alias="Social

Forward to Facebook - SharePasteHTML" title="Publish to

Facebook"><imgsrc="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a>

<a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('LinkedIn','US','SharePasteHTML')=%%" alias="Social

Forward to LinkedIn - SharePasteHTML" title="Publish to

LinkedIn"><imgsrc="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_linkedin_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="LinkedIn" title="LinkedIn"></a>

For both the Facebook and LinkedIn links, the hrefattribute calls the AMPscript function GetSocialPublishURLByName to share the defined

region SharePasteHTML. The second argument of the function must match the defined title in the RegionTitle tags. The first argument

of GetSocialPublishURLByName defines the social network with which to share the email. In this example, the links identify Facebook

and LinkedIn.

Example: This example shows the HTML for the entire email message, including the unshared view as a webpage link at the top

and footer and the bottom.

<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"

"http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd">

<html>

<head>

<title>Thank you for your interest in Email.</title>

html body { margin: 0; padding: 0; font: 0.76em normal Arial, Verdana,

Helvetica, sans-serif; color: #554; }

#cntr { width: 600px; }

#cntr .cnt { margin: 1.0em }

#cntr .cnt span { font-size: 1.5em; color: #000; }

#cntr .cnt strong { font-size: 1.0em }

</style>

</head>

<body bottommargin="0" leftmargin="0" rightmargin="0" marginheight="0"

marginwidth="0" topmargin="0">

<tr>

<td valign="top" align="left"><font face="verdana" size="1"

color="#444444"><p>To view this email as a web page, go <a href="%%view_email_url%%"

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

alias="View as a Web Page"> here.</a></p></font></td>

</tr>

</table>

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"SharePasteHTML", title:"Sharing an entire Paste

HTML email", description:"Sharing an entire email to Facebook and LinkedIn"] -->

<div align="center" style="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color:

_fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color:

#333;">

<div id="cntr" align="left" style="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color:

_fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color:

#FFF;"></div>

<div class="nav" style="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height:

_fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height:

_fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: 50px; width: 600px; background:

#222 url('http://image.exct.net/8c953a0c-d.jpg');">

<tr>

<td valign="left">Thanks for your interest in Social Forward!</td>

</tr>

</table></div>

<div class="cnt" style="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom:

_fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom:

_fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom: 1px solid

#CCC; margin: 1.0em">

<p>At the bottom of the email, you can see Facebook and LinkedIn icons.

Click them to share your content to the appropriate social network.</p>

<p>You can share this entire email via Social Forward!</p>

<p>

href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','SharePasteHTML')=%%" alias="Social

Forward to Facebook - YahooPasteHTML" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a>

href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('LinkedIn','US','SharePasteHTML')=%%" alias="Social

Forward to LinkedIn - YahooPasteHTML" title="Publish to LinkedIn"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_linkedin_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="LinkedIn" title="LinkedIn"></a>

</p>

</div>

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

<tr>

<td valign="top" align="left" style="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height:

_fckstyle="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height:

_fckstyle="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height: 16px;">

<p><font face="verdana" size="1" color="#777777">This email was

sent to: <b>%%emailaddr%%</b><br />

<a href="%%subscription_center_url%%" alias="Manage

Subscriptions">Manage Subscriptions</a> |

<a href="%%profile_center_url%%" alias="Update Profile">Update

Profile</a> |

<a href="%%unsub_center_url%%" alias="Unsubscribe">One-Click

Unsubscribe</a></p>

<p>This email was sent by: <b>%%Member_Busname%%</b><br

/>%%Member_Addr%% %%Member_City%%, %%Member_State%% %%Member_PostalCode%%

%%Member_Country%%</p>

<p>We respect your right to privacy - <a

href="http://email.exacttarget.com/ETWeb/company.aspx?id=80" alias="View Privacy Policy"

style="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

_fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

_fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

#0000ff">view our policy</a></p>

</font>

</td>

<td width="145" align="right" valign="center"><a

href="http://www.marketingcloud.com" title="This email is Powered By Salesforce Marketing

Cloud Engagement" alias="Powered By"><img

src="http://email.exacttarget.com/images/Powered_By_1206.jpg" width="124" height="55"

alt="This email is Powered By Salesforce Marketing Cloud Engagement" border="0"

/></a></td>

</tr>

</table>

</body>

</html>

Supported Social Networks

This list contains all social networks supported by Social Forward in Email Studio.

Facebook

Delicious

Digg

MySpace

StumbleUpon

Google

Yahoo

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

ShareThis

Twitter

Facebook Like

Google+

Viadeo

Xing

Social Content Slot Sharing via AMPscript in a Paste HTML Email

Creating an email in Email Studio by pasting HTML code into an email allows you a great deal of control over how your email appears

to your subscribers. That same control makes sharing social content slots via pasted HTML an effective tool in getting your content onto

social networks.

You can create and place your shared social content slots and icons with great precision. You can also easily create multiple shared social

content slots in one document. If your normal workflow included using pasted HTML to create your emails, adding Social Forward

markup integrates into your process.

Additionally, you can use AMPscript to determine which content is shown to your subscribers and their friends on social networks.

AMPscript allows you to better personalize your messages and make them apply to your target audience.

Paste HTML Email

Create your Paste HTML email in Email Studio and identify the sections of the email to share. The example on this page shares a social

content slot to Facebook, but you can choose from several different social networks when sharing content using Social Forward.

Social Content Slots When Viewed as a Webpage

Use AMPscript to determine whether the email is being displayed as a webpage. If a webpage is used to display the content, this

AMPscript displays the text contained in the code block:

%%[ if _MessageContext == "VAWP" then ]%% You're reading this text because you're

viewing this email as a webpage! %%[ endif ]%%

This Paste HTML code includes the AMPscript. You can use this code to share a social content slot:

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"FacebookCustomIcon", title:"Facebook with Custom Icon",

description:"Facebook with Custom Icon"] -->

<p>Custom Facebook Icon</p>

<tbody>

<tr>

</tr>

</tbody>

</table>

<strong>This content represents the second shared social content slot.

%%[ if _MessageContext == "VAWP" then ]%%

You're reading this text because you're viewing this email as a webpage!

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

%%[ endif ]%%

</strong></p>

<p><a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookCustomIcon')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook - FacebookCustomIcon" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ff66157875/m/1/facebook-alt.png" border="0"

alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

Social Content Slots When Viewed as a Webpage or Shared

Use this code to share the longer webpage version of the content instead of the shorter email version:

%%[ if _MessageContext == "VAWP" or _MessageContext == "Social" then ]%% You're reading

this text because you're viewing this email as a webpage! %%[ endif ]%%

If the message is viewed as a webpage or shared, the AMPscript displays the longer text included in the code block. You can separate

the _MessageContext checks into two different If statements to change how each context displays your content.

Example: This email uses AMPscript to change the displayed content depending on whether the email is being displayed in an

inbox or as a webpage. The content shared is always the content from the email view.

<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"

"http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd">

<html>

<head>

<title>Thank you for your interest in ExactTarget Email.</title>

html body { margin: 0; padding: 0; font: 0.76em normal Arial, Verdana, Helvetica,

sans-serif; color: #554; }

#cntr { width: 600px; }

#cntr .cnt { margin: 1.0em }

#cntr .cnt span { font-size: 1.5em; color: #000; }

#cntr .cnt strong { font-size: 1.0em }

</style>

</head>

<body bottommargin="0" leftmargin="0" rightmargin="0" marginheight="0" marginwidth="0"

topmargin="0">

<tr>

<td valign="top" align="left"><font face="verdana" size="1" color="#444444"><p>To

view this email as a web page, go <a href="%%view_email_url%%" alias="View as a Web

Page"> here.</a></p></font></td>

</tr>

</table>

<div class="nav" style="height: 50px; width: 600px; background: #222

url('http://image.exct.net/8c953a0c-d.jpg');">

<tr>

<td valign="left"><strong>This email uses the new Social Forward feature!</strong></td>

</tr>

</table></div>

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"FacebookStandardIcon", title:"Facebook Standard Icon",

description:"Share to Facebook with Standard Icon"] -->

<p>Standard Facebook Icon</p>

<p><table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" align="left"><tbody><tr><td

align="right">Hi! </td></tr></tbody></table><strong>This content represents the

first shared social content slot.</strong></p>

<p><a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookStandardIcon')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook - standard icon" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"FacebookCustomIcon", title:"Facebook with Custom Icon",

description:"Facebook with Custom Icon"] -->

<p>Custom Facebook Icon</p>

<p><table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" align="left"><tbody><tr><td

align="right">Hi! </td></tr></tbody></table><strong>This content represents the

second shared social content slot.

%%[ if _MessageContext == "VAWP" then ]%%

You're reading this text because you're viewing this email as a webpage!

%%[ endif ]%%

</strong></p>

<p><a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookCustomIcon')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook - FacebookCustomIcon" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ff66157875/m/1/facebook-alt.png"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

</div>

<tr>

<p><font face="verdana" size="1" color="#777777">This email was sent to:

<b>%%emailaddr%%</b><br />

<a href="%%subscription_center_url%%" alias="Manage Subscriptions">Manage

Subscriptions</a> |

<a href="%%profile_center_url%%" alias="Update Profile">Update Profile</a> |

<a href="%%unsub_center_url%%" alias="Unsubscribe">One-Click Unsubscribe</a></p>

<p>This email was sent by: <b>%%Member_Busname%%</b><br />%%Member_Addr%%

%%Member_City%%, %%Member_State%% %%Member_PostalCode%% %%Member_Country%%</p>

<p>We respect your right to privacy - <a

href="http://email.exacttarget.com/ETWeb/company.aspx?id=80" alias="View Privacy Policy"

style="color: #0000ff">view our policy</a></p>

</font>

</td>

<td width="145" align="right" valign="center"><a href="http://www.exacttarget.com"

title="This email is Powered By ExactTarget" alias="Powered By"><img

src="http://email.exacttarget.com/images/Powered_By_1206.jpg" width="124" height="55"

alt="This email is Powered By ExactTarget" border="0" /></a></td>

</tr>

</table>

</body>

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

</html>

Social Content Slot Sharing in a Paste HTML Email

Creating an email in Email Studio by pasting HTML code into an email allows you a great deal of control over how your email appears

to your subscribers. That same control makes sharing social content slots via pasted HTML an effective tool in getting your content onto

social networks. You can create and place your shared social content slots and icons with great precision using the directions provided

below. You can also easily create multiple shared social content slots in one document. If your normal workflow included using pasted

HTML to create your emails, adding Social Forward markup should integrate easily into your process.

This reference uses a Paste HTML email in Email Studio and identifies the sections of the email to share. The example shares a social

content slot to Facebook, but you can choose from several different social networks when sharing content using Social Forward.

Standard Facebook Icon Content Area Sharing

The HTML comment tags surround the information to be shared in the social content slot. The tag below starts the social content slot

and assigns it a name.

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"FacebookStandardIcon", title:"Facebook Standard Icon",

description:"Share to Facebook with Standard Icon", csskey:"CSS file"] -->

The csskey parameter allows a CSS file to be associated to the social content area and controls the styling of that shared content.

The tag below ends the social content slot with the same name listed in the beginning tag.

The shared content itself, including the text and image, appears between these two comment tags.

The shared social content slot includes an hyperlinked image that leads to the shared content.

This code creates the button users can click to share the shared content slot:

<a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookStandardIcon')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook - standard icon" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a>

You can use AMPscript to specify the destination URL in the href attribute of the link tag:

%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookStandardIcon')=%%

You can change the AMPScript function to share different slots to different social networks by simply changing the arguments passed.

The first argument passed to GetSocialPublishURLByName indicates the social network with which Social Forward will share the content.

Use the name of the region to share in the second argument. In this case, you are sharing the region FacebookPasteStandardIcon.

Note: Be sure that the social slot name of the region matches the title you put in the HTML comments when defining the sharable

region.

The image within the link tags shares the region, as shown in the code below:

<img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook">

The source tag specifies the default image used for Facebook.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The final code block used by Social Forward to share a social content slot looks like this example:

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"FacebookStandardIcon", title:"Facebook Standard Icon",

description:"Share to Facebook with Standard Icon"] -->

<p>Standard Facebook Icon</p>

<p><table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" align="left"><tbody><tr><td

align="right">Hi! </td></tr></tbody></table><strong>This content represents the first

shared social content slot.</strong></p>

<p><a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookStandardIcon')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook - standard icon" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

Custom Facebook Icon Content Area Sharing

Sharing the Custom Facebook Icon slot using a custom icon is very similar to using the standard icon, with a few differences:

•

The HTML comments defining the region to share have the title FacebookPasteCustomIcon.

•

The AMPScript function within the sharing link references the area FacebookPasteCustomIcon.

•

The image contained within the HTML link tags specifies a custom icon source in the Portfolio.

This code shares the custom icon region:

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"FacebookCustomIcon", title:"Facebook with Custom Icon",

description:"Facebook with Custom Icon"] -->

<p>Custom Facebook Icon</p>

<p><table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" align="left"><tbody><tr><td

align="right">Hi! </td></tr></tbody></table><strong>This content represents the second

shared social content slot.</strong></p>

<p><a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookCustomIcon')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook - FacebookCustomIcon" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ff66157875/m/1/facebook-alt.png" border="0"

alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

Example: This example shows the HTML for the email:

<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN"

"http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/strict.dtd">

<html>

<head>

<title>Thank you for your interest in ExactTarget Email.</title>

html body { margin: 0; padding: 0; font: 0.76em normal Arial, Verdana,

Helvetica, sans-serif; color: #554; }

#cntr { width: 600px; }

#cntr .cnt { margin: 1.0em }

#cntr .cnt span { font-size: 1.5em; color: #000; }

#cntr .cnt strong { font-size: 1.0em }

</style>

</head>

<body bottommargin="0" leftmargin="0" rightmargin="0" marginheight="0"

marginwidth="0" topmargin="0">

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

<tr>

<td valign="top" align="left"><font face="verdana" size="1"

color="#444444"><p>To view this email as a web page, go <a href="%%view_email_url%%"

alias="View as a Web Page"> here.</a></p></font></td>

</tr>

</table>

<div align="center" style="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color:

_fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color:

_fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color: #333;">

<div id="cntr" align="left" style="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color:

_fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color:

_fckstyle="background-color: _fckstyle="background-color: #FFF;">

<div class="nav" style="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height:

_fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height:

_fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: _fckstyle="height: 50px;

width: 600px; background: #222 url('http://image.exct.net/8c953a0c-d.jpg');">

<tr>

<td valign="left"><strong>This email uses the new Social Forward

feature!</strong></td>

</tr>

</table></div>

<div class="cnt" style="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom:

_fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom:

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

_fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom:

_fckstyle="border-bottom: _fckstyle="border-bottom: 1px solid #CCC; margin: 1.0em">

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"FacebookStandardIcon", title:"Facebook Standard

Icon", description:"Share to Facebook with Standard Icon"] -->

<p>Standard Facebook Icon</p>

<p><table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" align="left"><tbody><tr><td

align="right">Hi! </td></tr></tbody></table><strong>This content represents the

first shared social content slot.</strong></p>

<p><a

href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookStandardIcon')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook - standard icon" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"FacebookCustomIcon", title:"Facebook with Custom

Icon", description:"Facebook with Custom Icon"] -->

<p>Custom Facebook Icon</p>

<p><table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" align="left"><tbody><tr><td

align="right">Hi! </td></tr></tbody></table><strong>This content represents the

second shared social content slot.</strong></p>

<p><a

href="%%=GetSocialPublishURLByName('Facebook','US','FacebookCustomIcon')=%%"

alias="Social Forward to Facebook - FacebookCustomIcon" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ff66157875/m/1/facebook-alt.png"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

</div>

<tr>

<td valign="top" align="left" style="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height:

_fckstyle="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height:

_fckstyle="line-height: _fckstyle="line-height: 16px;">

<p><font face="verdana" size="1" color="#777777">This email was

sent to: <b>%%emailaddr%%</b><br />

<a href="%%subscription_center_url%%" alias="Manage

Subscriptions">Manage Subscriptions</a> |

<a href="%%profile_center_url%%" alias="Update Profile">Update

Profile</a> |

<a href="%%unsub_center_url%%" alias="Unsubscribe">One-Click

Unsubscribe</a></p>

<p>This email was sent by: <b>%%Member_Busname%%</b><br

/>%%Member_Addr%% %%Member_City%%, %%Member_State%% %%Member_PostalCode%%

%%Member_Country%%</p>

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

<p>We respect your right to privacy - <a

href="http://email.exacttarget.com/ETWeb/company.aspx?id=80" alias="View Privacy Policy"

style="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

_fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

_fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

_fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

_fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

_fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color:

_fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: _fckstyle="color: #0000ff">view

our policy</a></p>

</font>

</td>

<td width="145" align="right" valign="center"><a

href="http://www.exacttarget.com" title="This email is Powered By ExactTarget"

alias="Powered By"><img src="http://email.exacttarget.com/images/Powered_By_1206.jpg"

width="124" height="55" alt="This email is Powered By ExactTarget" border="0"

/></a></td>

</tr>

</table>

</body>

</html>

Content Areas and Social Forward Tags

Email Studio Social Forward tags wrap content areas to allow sharing via social networks.

Content Area Wrapping

Use these tags used to wrap social content:

<!-- RegionStart[ socialslot:"Shared content region 1",

title:"First shared email content",

description:"This is an example of shared content",

csskey:"portfolio css 1"] -->

The first line begins the tag and names the social slot. This name is designates the content area for sharing. The second line creates a

title for social networks to use when identifying the shared content. The third line creates a short description that will be included in the

item posted to the social network. The fourth line identifies any CSS style sheet to use for the item when it is shared to the social network.

This tag identifies the end of the shared social content region:

The name in this tag must use the same value as the beginning tag.

Content Area Sharing

The application uses this AMPscript to create the link using the numeric indicator for Facebook:

<a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURL('1','Shared content region 1')=%%" alias="Social Forward

to ShareThis - SharePasteHTML" title="Publish to ShareThis"><img src="Go to your

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Portfolio/Social Forward Folder and copy URL for the Social Forward Icon" alt="ShareThis"

border="0" title="Insert Title Here"></a>

In this example, replace the phrase Social Network with the number of the social network you wish to use and Shared content region 1

with the name of your shared social content region. You can also change the alias, alt, and titles to whatever is most appropriate for your

content. Finally, place the URL for the image you want to use in the link in the img src tag.

Use Standard and Custom Icons to Share Content

Social Forward uses a default set of icons to represent the social networks supported within Email Studio. You can alter the appearence

of icons to call attention to a section, such as changing the size or color of the icon. You can also alter the icon to better fit the design

of your email. These steps allow you to change the icons used in Social Forward in a specific message without alterting the default icons.

This task require familiarity with HTML and AMPscript to make full use of the Social Forward section.

1. Begin your email in Email Studio using a template or by revising an existing email.

2. Click a content box and select Create Content.

3. Choose an HTML content box and click Next.

4. Click the Insert menu and select the Social Forward Area... option.

5. Enter the Shared Content Slot name, Title, and Description. Choose a CSS stylesheet if you wish. Click OKwhen you're finished.

6. Paste either the Standard Icon or the Custom Icon Base HTML Mark-up inside the two HTML region tags. You can find that code in

the appropriate section below.

7. Paste the Social Specific HTML Mark-up wherever you want the icon to be located. We recommend placing it as close to the content

to be shared as possible for best results, but you can locate the code anywhere in the email. Make sure the content slot name matches

in the region tags and the code.

Example: This example shows a standard email using content boxes to share content with a standard Facebook icon:

The Base HTML Mark-Up contains the general content in the box:

<p>Standard Facebook Icon</p>

<tbody>

<tr>

<td align="right"><a href="https://example.com" conversion="false" title=""

alias="">Share this link using the Facebook icon!</a></td>

</tr>

</tbody>

</table>

<p>This link takes you to Example.com.</p>

The Social Specific HTML Mark-Up contains the content specific to sharing the content in the box. Make sure the content slot name

in the GetSocialPublishURL() function matches the name you gave your content slot in the Create Your Email steps.

<p><a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURL('1','StandardFacebookShare')=%%" alias="Social

Forward to Facebook" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ffcf14/m/1/social_default_facebook_icon.jpg"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

This example shows a standard email using content boxes to share content with a custom Facebook icon.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The Base HTML Mark-Up contains the general content in the box.

<p>Custom Facebook Icon</p>

<tbody>

<tr>

<td align="right"><a href="https://example.com" conversion="false"

title="" alias="">Share this link using the Facebook icon!</a></td>

</tr>

</tbody>

</table>

<p>This link takes you to Example.com.</p>

The Social Specific HTML Mark-Up contains the content specific to sharing the content in the box. The difference between this

Mark-Up and the Standard Icon Social Specific Mark-Up is the URL specified in the img src="" tag. Make sure the content slot name

in the GetSocialPublishURL() function matches the name you gave your content slot in the Create Your Email steps.

<p><a href="%%=GetSocialPublishURL('1','CustomFacebookShare')=%%" alias="Social

Forward to Facebook" title="Publish to Facebook"><img

src="http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ff66157875/m/1/facebook-alt.png"

border="0" alt="Facebook" title="Facebook"></a></p>

Create a Content Area for Each Social Network

Follow these steps to create a content area distributed via Social Forward in Email Studio for each social network.

1. Click Content.

2. Click my contents, then click Create Content.

3. Enter the name of your content box, choose the location of your content, then click Next.

4. Choose the content box of your choice, select the type of content you wish to enter, then enter your content.

5. Click the Edit menu and select Social Properties. Choose the Allow Content To Be Shared checkbox.

6. Enter the name of the shared content slot and the title and description of the web page to be shared. You can also select a CSS

stylesheet to modify the appearance of the shared web page.

7. Click OK.

8. Click the Insert menu and choose Social Forward.

9. Select the social network with which you want to share the social content slot and choose the appropriate content slot in the

dropdown menu. Click OK when you finish.

10. Click Save.

11. Repeat these steps for each social network or combination of social networks with which you want to share content.

Be sure to create a default content section in case a subscriber doesn't have a social network preference or has listed a preference

for which you haven't created content.

Set Up the Dynamic Content Area

Follow these steps to set up the dynamic content area for sharing to different social networks in Email Studio.

1. In your email, click the content area you want to hold the dynamic content, then choose Create Dynamic Content.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

2. In the drop-down menu in the Dynamic Content window, choose the subscriber list or sendable data extension that contains the

SocialNetwork attribute.

3. In the Default Content section, click Browse and select the content displayed if there are no matches for a subscriber's preferred

social network.

4. For the dynamic content rules, click the first drop-down menu and choose Social Network.

5. In the second drop-down menu, select Is Equal To.

6. In the third drop-down menu, select the social network for the created content area.

7. Click Browse under the rule and select the content that corresponds to the social network you chose.

8. Click Add Rule and add another rule for each social network for which you have content.

9. When you have covered all of your social networks, click OK. The dynamic content area will display the default content you have

specified.

The email displays the correct dynamic content area based on the subscriber's preference from the subscriber list or sendable data

extension.

Share Content to Different Social Networks Dynamically

Use preferences from a data extension or subscriber list to determine which social network icons appear in the email for use with Social

Forward in Email Studio. Using dynamic content in conjunction with Social Forward allows you to determine which subscribers receive

certain content and where they can share that content.

This example assumes that you have an attribute in a subscriber list or sendable data extension named SocialNetwork. The information

contained in that attribute for each subscriber determines which social network icon that subscriber views. You should also be familiar

with creating and using dynamic content.

Depending on your subscribers' preferences, they may prefer to use only certain social networks to share content. Subscribers may also

maintain accounts on only certain social networks and will not use additional icons included in their emails. You can share different

content areas with users depending on their SocialNetwork attribute value

Change Default Social Network Icons

Follow these steps to change the default social network icons for Social Forward in Email Studio.

1. Create your custom icon and save it as a .jpg file. All icons require .jpg files except for ShareThis, which uses a .gif file.

2. In the Social folder of Portfolio, right-click on the image to change and save the image to your computer. Keep this image as a backup

in case you want to reuse it later.

3. Delete the image in the Social folder.

4. Click Single Upload, choose the new image file, and enter the name and external key for your image. Make sure this information

matches the information for the previous image exactly.

5. Click OK when done.

Apply a CSS File from Portfolio to Shared Content

When IDs receive multiple attributes from different style sheets or instances in the same style sheet, the resulting landing page may not

appear as you expected. For best results, create a dedicated style sheet that provides the CSS for the landing page. This step prevents

problems with cascading attributes from multiple style sheets.

Be sure to test your landing page in multiple browsers to make sure the page appears according to your specifications. This step helps

you avoid problems later when your subscribers view the pages in an environment different than the one you used for creating.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

1. Create your email content.

2. Click Edit and choose Social Properties.

3. Choose the Allow Content To Be Shared checkbox and enter the information in each field.

4. For the Stylesheet (CSS) field, locate the style sheet to apply to the shared content slot after it has been published to a social network.

5. Click OK.

6. Click Insert, then choose Social Forward.

7. Choose the checkboxes next to the links for the social networks to include in your email content area.

8. Select the content area to associated with these networks from the Associate with Shared Content Slot dropdown menu.

CSS Files and Shared Content in Social Forward

Assigning a CSS file to your shared content allows you to better dictate how your content will appear on social networks. You can specify

how certain elements in your message will appear when shared using CSS, and storing the file in your Email Studio Portfolio gives you

a central location for managing the appearance of your content.

Be familiar with Shared Content, HTML, CSS, and AMPscript in order to use the information in this example. The CSS style sheet specified

by Social Forward affects how that content is displayed after the content has been shared. You must upload your desired style sheet to

the Social folder on your Portfolio.

CSS and Social Forward

Social Forward allows you to attach a CSS style sheet to shared social content slots in your email. This style sheet does not affect the look

of the email itself, but it changes the appearance of the content once that content has been shared on a social network:

•

Font families and sizes

•

Headers and footers

•

Simple injection of text, but not HTML

•

Show or hide DIV tags

Social Forward does not permit CSS to use or perform these actions:

•

Conditional logic

•

Inserting rich content or content from your Portfolio

•

Placing additional links in your content

Location/DescriptionID

The ID hdr refers to the header of the landing page. It contains

hdrLogo on the left and hdrText to the right of the logo.

#hdr

The ID hdrLogo is inside hdr and determines the logo displayed in

the header.

#hdrLogo

The ID hdrText is inside the ID hdr and to the right of the ID

hdrLogo. Enter the text for the header in the Title field of the

#hdrText

Content Area Properties window. You can open that window in

Email Studio by clicking Edit>Social Properties while modifying

a content area.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The ID cntnr container includes the container with ID contentCntnr

and the ID ftr below that. The ID contentCntnr includes the ID text

#cntnr and #contentCntnr

with both a header (h1) with the description and a paragraph (p)

with the shared content.

The ID #text defaults to a 600px wide div with both a header (h1)

with the description and a paragraph (p) with the shared content.

#text

The ID #text h1 inside of the ID text refers to the heading in the

whitespace underneath the header bar. Enter the text for the

#text h1

header in the Description field of the Content Area Properties

window. You can open that window in Email Studio by clicking

Edit>Social Properties while modifying a content area.

The ID #text p refers to the content in the whitespace under the

ID #text h1 but above the footer (which is shown as a line with

#text p

the shared social content slot.

The ID ftr refers to the footer div of the landing page. It is contained

within the ID cntnr. This example customizes the logo on the page

#ftr

with the published shared content, along with other changes to

the look and feel

Example: In this example, the CSS performs this styling:

•

Creates, sets, and aligns a background for the header (#hdr)

•

Sets and aligns a logo for the header (#hdr #hdrLogo)

•

Modifies the format of the title text (#hdrText) contained within the header

•

Changes the text style in the social slot description (#cntrn #text h1)

•

Modifies the style of the social slot shared content (#cntnr #text p)

•

Changes the style of the footer (#ftr) and footer Privacy Policy link (#ftr a)

#hdr {

background: #9ccdcf

url('http://image.preview.exacttarget.com/lib/ff66157875/m/1/BxTgtBckGnd.gif') repeat-x;

background-position: bottom left;

border-bottom: 7px solid #dad6d3;

}

#hdr #logo {

display:block;

background-image:

url('http://image.exct.net/lib/fef51d73776c00/m/1/thumb/png/CSSLogo.jpg');

width: 100px;

height: 50px;

background-repeat: no-repeat;

background-position: top left;

}

#hdr #hdrText {

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

font-size: 25px;

color: #FFF;

padding: 35px 7px;

}

#cntnr #text h1 {

font-size: 18px;

color: #56999D;

line-height: 23px;

}

#cntnr #text p {

font-size: 14px;

line-height: 18px;

}

#ftr {

padding: 15px 15px 15px 0;

border-top: 1px solid #AAA; margin: 15px 0 0 0;

}

#ftr a {

color: #8bb6b8;

font-weight: bold;

padding: 7px;

text-decoration: none;

}

#ftr a[class=rnd]

{ -moz-border-radius: 7px;

border-radius: 7px;

-webkit-border-radius: 7px;

}

#ftr a:Hover

{ background-color: #EEE;

color: #444;

}

.clr { clear: both; }

Sample Tracking Queries for Social Forward

These queries allow you to obtain tracking information, such as content impressions and shared content slots, regarding the information

you shared through the Social Forward function. Use these sample tracking queries below in your Automation Studio query activities

to obtain the specified information. View the information in the resulting data extension.

Count All Shared Content Impressions

This query provides a count of page views of the shared content grouped by Job ID. Create an Automation Studio query activity with

this string:

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

SELECT s.JobID, s.SocialSharingSiteID, s.SiteName, COUNT(s.JobID) AS TotalImpressions

FROM _SocialNetworkImpressions s GROUP BY s.JobID, s.SocialSharingSiteID, s.SiteName

Get All Shared Content Impressions

This query provides information on each page view of the shared content. Create an Automation Studio query activity with this string:

SELECT s.JobID, s.SocialSharingSiteID, s.SiteName, s.TransactionTime AS EventDate FROM

_SocialNetworkImpressions s

Get All Shared Content Slots

This query provides information on the content which has been shared, along with who shared the content. Create an Automation

Studio query activity with this string:

SELECT s.JobID, s.SubscriberID, s.SocialSharingSiteID, s.SiteName FROM _SocialNetworkTracking s

Email Attachments

Use Email Studio to send email attachments that aren’t included in the main body of an email. The recipient can open and save the

attachment independently of the email message.

You can send a file as an attachment to your email jobs, but keep in mind that attaching certain file types or extremely large files can

cause deliverability problems and reduce the effectiveness of your message. Email Studio can include images in email content. Therefore,

you don’t need to attach an image to an email to have it appear. Use email attachments for files intended for use outside of the email,

such as documents that you want the subscriber to review or download.

Prerequisites

Contact your account executive to enable this feature for your account. You must be familiar with AMPscript to send emails with

attachments. Your account executive can also adjust the threshold of errors that cause the send job to stop prematurely. Adjusting the

threshold can prevent a single error from stopping the entire job.

Where to Store Your Email Attachments

You can attach files to your emails from three different locations.

•

Content Builder

•

Your Marketing Cloud Engagement FTP location

•

A separate website

To attach a file from a separate website, include the full URL of the site in the AttachFile AMPscript function. For a Marketing Cloud FTP

attachment, enter the name of the file located in the Import section of your FTP site. If the files aren’t available at send time, you receive

an error.

Deciding Which File Types to Send

Although you can attach ZIP and RAR files, many email systems either strip these files from the message or block the message for security

purposes. Compressed files have been used to send viruses, worms, and other malware.

To ensure that a compressed file reaches your subscribers, place the file on a separate web server and include a link to the file in your

email.

ContentEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Mailbox Size Limits

Many email systems apply quotas on email account storage space. Files greater than 1 MB can strain limits and prevent messages from

reaching a subscriber. To avoid problems with mailbox size limits, security issues, and send speeds, attach the smallest possible file.

Attaching several small files affects emails the same way as a single large file. As the total size of an email increases, it takes more time

to send. Email systems evaluate the message as a whole, so keep the number of attachments to a minimum to ensure better deliverability.

Security Issues

Files attached from your FTP site or an external URL aren’t scanned for viruses, so make sure that the file is free of security issues.

Tracking Email Attachments

Marketing Cloud tracks email with attachments the same as regular email messages for opens, clicks, bounces, and similar information.

However, Marketing Cloud can’t track whether the subscriber opened the attachment or clicked links inside the document. Tracking

information pertains to the actual email message and not the attachment.

Classic Content Retirement

Email Studio Classic Content was retired during the Marketing Cloud Engagement Spring ’23 release. To create and edit emails and

templates, use Content Builder, which includes functionality not available in Classic Content. Content Builder tools are also more secure

and flexible.

Use these resources to learn about Content Builder features.

•

Salesforce Help: Content Builder

•

Salesforce Help: Get Started with Content Builder

•

Salesforce Help: Content Builder Editor Best Practices and Tips

•

Salesforce video: Email Studio and Content Builder Marketing Cloud Basics

•

Recorded webinar: Marketing Cloud New Email Studio for Admins

•

Recorded webinar: Marketing Cloud New Email Studio for All Users

For more information, see Marketing Cloud - Classic Content Retirement.

Subscribers

A subscriber is a person who has opted to receive communications from your organization. You must have a valid email address for each

subscriber who receives emails. For each subscriber who receives SMS messages, you must have a valid phone number. You can track

additional information about subscribers using profile and preference attributes. Use the subscriber key to identify your subscribers in

Marketing Cloud Engagement. Create lists or data extensions to store your subscribers. Store email subscriber information in lists or data

extensions, and store SMS subscriber information in data extensions only. To segment your subscribers, create as many lists and data

extensions as you need. You populate the information in the lists and data extensions when you add or import subscribers.

There are several different ways to add subscribers:

•

Use the subscriber import wizard.

•

Use the Automation Studio import activity.

•

Create a subscriber manually.

•

Capture subscriber information through a Smart Capture form.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Use groups and data filters to further segment subscribers. When you send a message, you select the list, data extension, or groups to

receive the message.

Get Access to Enhanced Segmentation and Subscriber Features

Get access to enhanced segmentation and subscriber features in Email Studio.

Enhanced Subscribers in Email Studio

Subscribers functionality with the enhanced subscriber features enabled in Email Studio.

Classic Subscribers in Email Studio

Learn more about subscribers functionality when the enhanced subscriber features enabled in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud

Engagement.

Send Logging in Email Studio

Use send logging in Email Studio to obtain run-time information about email send attributes for use in reports and data extracts.

You can also use information in your send log to provide information for highly available clicks. Send logging gives you access to

data not available via standard tracking functions. You can specify how long that information remains available depending on your

data retention needs.

Email Studio Web Collect

Web Collect is Email Studio's sign-up form functionality that allows your subscribers to subscribe, provide attribute information, or

unsubscribe from your communications on your website.

List Detective

List Detective is a tool that maintains information on email addresses and domains that could cause deliverability problems for your

email sends. This includes email addresses that are known spam traps (inactive addresses used by domains to identify spammers)

and domains that no longer provide email services.

Email Studio Welcome Emails

Welcome emails are the most opened emails among subscribers and often the first impression of your company's email marketing.

Send an Email Studio welcome email when a subscriber is added or joins a list. The Welcome Email feature doesn’t support imports,

manually created subscribers, Smart Capture, or API.

Email Studio List vs. Email Studio Data Extension

Learn about when to use a list versus a data extension in Email Studio.

Unsubscribes

Learn about unsubscribes in Email Studio and Marketing Cloud Engagement.

How a Subscriber Opts Out

Learn how a subscriber opts out in Email Studio.

Bounce Mail Management in Email Studio

Learn about bounce mail management in Marketing Cloud’s Email Studio.

Forward to a Friend

Forward to a Friend is an image you add to emails you send to your subscribers. When subscribers want to share the information in

your email with friends, they click the image and fill out the form.

Get Access to Enhanced Segmentation and Subscriber Features

Get access to enhanced segmentation and subscriber features in Email Studio.

1. In Email Studio, click either Lists, Groups, Data Extensions, or Data Filters under Subscribers.

2. Click Learn More on the banner.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

3. Read through the content then click Get It Now.

Note: If you don’t see Get It Now, contact your account administrator.

Enhanced Segmentation and Subscriber Features FAQ

Read about frequently asked questions with drag-and-drop segmentation and enhanced subscriber features in Email Studio.

Enhanced Segmentation and Subscriber Features FAQ

Read about frequently asked questions with drag-and-drop segmentation and enhanced subscriber features in Email Studio.

What is enhanced segmentation?

Enhanced segmentation provides a simple way to filter your subscriber base to send targeted and relevant messages to your subscribers.

Is there a cost associated with enhanced segmentation?

No, there is no cost associated. It is available for all Email Studio users.

How can I get access?

Account administrators are able to opt in to enhanced segmentation and all users within the account also get access to the enhanced

features. Once you opt in to enhanced segmentation, you can’t return to previous segmentation methods.

How does access work for Enterprise and Agency accounts?

At the top level, an account administrator enables access for all child accounts (business units, lock and publish accounts, and agency

clients). If the administrator does not want all child accounts to have access, they would log in to each child account(s) and opt in to for

the enhanced features for that specific account(s).

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

How does access work for new clients?

New accounts are automatically enabled for enhanced segmentation.

When I opt in for access, do I need to do anything else to get these enhancements?

Once the account administrator opts in for access to enhanced segmentation, the administrator logs out and log back in to see the

changes applied.

Is this tool available in all Email Studio editions?

Yes, enhanced segmentation is available in all Email Studio editions.

Do I have to use enhanced segmentation, or can I still use the current methods for segmenting subscribers?

If an administrator opts in for access, all users must use the enhanced segmentation. You can’t return to previous methods.

When I opt in for access, what is different?

From a user's experience, the screens provide a much more consistent look and feel to Marketing Cloud Engagement. You gain access

to enhanced segmentation and improved lists, data extensions and data filters view, and updated list, data extension, and data filter

details pages.

Are there any existing features not available with enhanced segmentation?

You can no longer create a random group based on a constant interval. You can continue to create a random group.

Enterprise 2.0 accounts and business units don’t automatically have group rules created as data filters. Instead, specify which groups

you want saved as data filters and edit the group directly rather than editing the data filter.

What happens to existing groups and data filters previously created?

Refresh and use existing groups and data filters in sending and automations. Edit existing groups and data filters using the enhanced

segmentation.

What are the different types of data extensions a user can create?

•

Standard Data Extension: Create custom fields to store data using a standard data extension.

•

Filtered Data Extension: Filter fields, measures, and filters for sendable data extensions from a source data extension to generate a

filtered data extension.

•

Random Data Extension: Randomly select subscribers from a source data extension using a random data extension.

Can I create a filtered data extension from another filtered data extension?

No. Create, a filtered data extension from a standard data extension. Use one of these alternative solutions to accomplish the same result

as creating a filtered data extension from another filtered data extension:

•

Create a filtered data extension from a saved or existing data filter. For example, if specific filter rules are used frequently, save the

rule as a data filter and continually use this saved data filter as a starting point for filtered data extensions.

•

Copy an existing data filter. Use the copied data filter as a starting point for a new data filter. Edit the new data filter and add rules.

Filtered data extensions created before enhanced segmentation, from other filtered data extensions, are supported and can be modified.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Are previously created data filters still accessible?

Yes, previously created data filters are accessible. Edit existing data filters using the enhanced segmentation and used them to create

new filtered data extensions. Data filters previously created from filtered data extensions are supported, but creating a new data filter

from a filtered data extension isn’t supported with the enhanced segmentation functionality. See previous question and answer for the

new method.

How can I build a filtered data extension on an existing data filter?

Navigate to your existing Data Filter and click the name to open it. Click Create Data Extension. Follow the steps to enter a name and

description, and choose the location for your filtered data extension. Click Save to create your new filtered data extension.

Why can I no longer make changes to filtered data extensions, such as edit the data extensions field names,

add new field names, and change a filtered non-sendable data extension to filtered sendable data extension

or vice versa?

In addition to profile and preference attributes, you can drag existing data filters to create groups. Create a new data filter using the

existing data filter tool or save a group's rules as a data filter.

•

The new interface provides a better view of the relationship between the original data extension (source) and the filtered data

extension (results of a filter). With the previous interface you could edit field names and add new field names to the filtered data

extension, but when the filter activity ran again, the filtered data extension reverted back to the original data extension configurations.

•

The filtered data extension adopts the same characteristics as the source data extension, in the new, simplified drag and drop

interface. To make a filtered data extension sendable, change the source data extension to sendable. To make a filtered data extension

non-sendable, change the source data extension to non-sendable.

How can I build a group based on an existing data filter?

In addition to profile and preference attributes, drag existing data filters to create groups. Create a new data filter using the existing data

filter tool or save a group's rules as a data filter.

Are previously created data filters still accessible?

Yes, previously created data filters are accessible.

Where are all data extension types saved?

Filtered, random, and standard data extensions are saved in the same location within the data extensions folder.

Are automations affected by using enhanced segmentation?

No, automations aren’t affected.

Are query activities affected by using enhanced segmentation?

No, query activity functionality isn’t changed.

What happens when new subscribers are added to your original list? (Do I need to refresh Groups?)

The same functionality for groups still applies. (Yes, new subscribers are only added after a refresh).

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Can I use mixed operators with groups?

Yes, you can use mixed operators with groups using enhanced segmentation.

Can I use data filters with different source lists?

Yes, use data filters with different source lists.

Can I segment for blank values or non-blank values?

Rather than using our existing work-around of creating a group with the operator exists in or not exists in followed by ,””, you can

select the operator is empty or is not empty. Your existing groups that use the work-around are converted to the new operators.

Enhanced Subscribers in Email Studio

Subscribers functionality with the enhanced subscriber features enabled in Email Studio.

1. Subscribers with Enhanced Subscriber Features

Include the subscriber's email status when exporting individual subscriber data or when exporting an entire subscriber list in Email

Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can also filter subscriber searches by status from the all subscribers list and the lists

subscriber tab.

2. Lists with Enhanced Subscriber Features

Learn about enhanced subscriber lists in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

3. Groups with Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The information in this document applies to accounts with the enhanced subscriber features. Refer to Groups with Classic Subscriber

Features if your account doesn’t have enhanced subscriber features enabled in Email Studio.

4. Data Extensions with Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Use data extensions with Email Studio to satisfy the need for flexible data storage. Using data extensions requires an understanding

of relational database structures and other technical expertise.

5. Data Filters with Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

A data filter is a group of criteria that segments a subscriber list or data extension. You can segment a subscriber list or data extension

using data filters and use the segments during an automation. Data Filters can be used with accounts that have enhanced subscriber

features turned on in Email Studio.

6. All Subscribers List in Email Studio

The All Subscribers list is considered the main list of records for the Email Studio account. Every subscriber in your account appears

in the All Subscribers list. Subscribers added to a subscriber list join the All Subscribers list at the same time. Subscribers stored on

data extensions join the All Subscribers list when you send your first message to that subscriber. If a subscriber is unsubscribed in

the All Subscribers list, the subscriber is unsubscribed from all lists and groups. When a subscriber is set back to active on the All

Subscribers list, the subscriber must also opt in for any other list and group separately. A subscriber can be unsubscribed on lists and

groups and be active on the All Subscribers lists.

7. Exclusion Lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement

An exclusion list is any list, group, or data extension you create in the application that at the time of send you select to exclude from

the send. If your Email Studio account has subscriber key enabled, the system excludes using the subscriber key value. If your account

does not have subscriber key enabled, the system excludes using email address.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

8. Publication Lists in Email Studio

Use publication and suppression lists to manage opt-ins for your email account in Email Studio. Use either publication lists or

suppression lists to control how subscribers receive your sends. Choose a publication list when sending email messages and SMS

messages to a sendable data extension.

9. Suppression Lists in Email Studio

You can use suppression and publication lists to manage opt-ins in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use publication

lists when you send email and SMS messages to a sendable data extension. Use suppression lists with guided, user-initiated, and

triggered email sends.

10. Profile and Preference Attributes in Email Studio

Email Studio uses profile and preference attributes to store information about subscribers. The profile attribute contains information

to characterize a subscriber profile. For example, each subscriber is asked to provide their birth date and email address. By default,

every account has three profile attributes: Full Name, Email, and UserDefined, which is intended as a generic attribute that you can

use as needed. By default, every account also receives an HTML Email preference attribute that is set to Yes. You can’t modify these

attributes.

11. Subscriber Key in Marketing Cloud Engagement

A subscriber key is a text field that contains a value that uniquely identifies a subscriber in Marketing Cloud Engagement. A subscriber

key is limited to 254 English characters. Avoid using email addresses as subscriber keys.

12. Profile Center for Marketing Cloud Engagement

The Profile Center is a web page where subscribers enter and maintain the personal information that you keep about them. When

you import a list in Email Studio, you can import attribute values for your subscribers. Subscribers can see this information in the

Profile Center and update and add to it. Every email that you send through Email Studio contains a link to the Profile Center for

subscribers to use.

13. Preview the Subscription Center

You can view the Subscription Center through Email Studio Profile Center in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

14. Send to a List in Email Studio

Send to a subscriber list with enhanced features in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Subscribers with Enhanced Subscriber Features

Include the subscriber's email status when exporting individual subscriber data or when exporting an entire subscriber list in Email Studio

for Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can also filter subscriber searches by status from the all subscribers list and the lists subscriber

tab.

Note: This information applies to accounts with the enhanced subscriber features enabled.

You must have a valid email address for each subscriber you plan to send an email to. A valid email address:

•

is less than 100 characters long

•

has no leading or trailing spaces

•

contains only supported ASCII characters

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

ExplanationStatusColor Code

A subscriber who meets either of these

criteria is considered active.

ActiveGreen

•

No activities have occurred to make the

subscriber's status bounced,

undeliverable, unsubscribed, or deleted.

•

A subscriber whose status was bounced

or undeliverable is recorded as having

opened or clicked through a received

email. In this case, the system changes

the subscriber's status back to active.

A subscriber who meets the following

criteria is considered bounced.

Bounced (Returned)Yellow

•

One or two soft bounces are received

for the subscriber.

•

One hard bounce is received for the

subscriber.

A subscriber who meets the following

criteria is considered held (undeliverable).

Held (Undeliverable)Gray

•

Three hard bounces or three soft

bounces are received for the subscriber

and at least 15 days have passed since

the first bounce.

If the bounce was from a trusted

domain, only one hard bounce is

required. For the most current list of

trusted domains, contact

[email protected].

A subscriber who meets any of the following

criteria is considered unsubscribed:

UnsubscribedRed

•

The subscriber has requested to be

removed from a single list, multiple lists,

or all lists. The subscriber's status is

changed to unsubscribed for the

selected lists or at the all subscribers

level.

•

An Engagement user manually

unsubscribes a subscriber on a list, thus

changing the status to unsubscribed for

that list.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

ExplanationStatusColor Code

•

The subscriber submitted an AOL spam

complaint. In this case, the subscriber's

status is changed to unsubscribed at

the all subscribers level.

A subscriber who meets either of the

following criteria is considered deleted:

Deleted

•

An Engagement user deleted a

subscriber from a list other than the all

subscribers list. In this case, the

subscriber's status for that list only is

deleted.

•

An Engagement user has deleted a

subscriber from the all subscribers list.

In this case, the subscriber's global

status is deleted.

Note: We do not recommend

deleting subscribers. To prevent

sending to a subscriber in a future

send, update the subscriber's status

to unsubscribed.

Add a Subscriber Manually

Create Subscriber steps you through defining an individual subscriber in Email Studio. When you add one subscriber, you have the

option of creating another individual subscriber with the same attribute selections. This information applies to accounts with the

enhanced subscriber features enabled. If your account doesn’t have this feature enabled, refer to Subscribers without Enhanced

Subscriber Features.

Imports

Import data into Email Studio to build subscriber lists.

Search for a Subscriber

Search for a subscriber using enhanced subscriber features in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Access Subscriber Properties in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Learn how to access subscriber properties in Email Studio.

Modify Subscriber Data in Marketing Cloud Engagement

View subscriber data and modify subscribers from subscriber properties in Email Studio. Regardless of where you access subscriber

properties, changes you make take effect throughout the application.

Export Email Studio Subscribers by Status

You can export subscribers based on subscriber status in Email Studio. This information applies to accounts with the enhanced

subscriber features enabled. To export subscribers, account admin role or permission to access lists is required.

Update Subscriber Status

Although it is possible to update a subscriber status in Marketing Cloud Engagement, it is discouraged.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Delete a Subscriber from Marketing Cloud Engagement

Use Delete Subscriber to delete a subscriber in Email Studio.

Import File Requirements for Email Studio

To ensure compatibility with Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement, import files have some detailed requirements.

SEE ALSO:

Subscribers without Enhanced Subscriber Features

Add a Subscriber Manually

Create Subscriber steps you through defining an individual subscriber in Email Studio. When you add one subscriber, you have the

option of creating another individual subscriber with the same attribute selections. This information applies to accounts with the enhanced

subscriber features enabled. If your account doesn’t have this feature enabled, refer to Subscribers without Enhanced Subscriber Features.

Note: If you're using a reseller or enterprise account and have enabled unsubscribe management, you can’t add email addresses

that appear on the Marketing Cloud Engagement global unsubscribe list or your account-level unsubscribe list.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click Lists.

3. Click the name of a list you’re adding the subscriber to.

4. Click Create.

5. Click Next in the wizard's introductory dialog box.

6. Complete the subscriber identity fields.

•

Enter the full email address of the subscriber.

•

Click one of the profile attributes defined in your account to activate its data entry field.

–

If the attribute is set to accept specific values only, the data entry field is a drop-down list from which you select the desired

value. Otherwise, the data entry field is a text box.

–

If a default value is defined for the attribute, that value is displayed in the data entry field.

–

Profile attributes displayed in red are required fields. Continue with the Create Subscriber wizard once these fields are

completed.

•

Select or deselect one of the corresponding preference attributes as appropriate for this subscriber.

Note: For Enterprise Accounts, Channel Name is a required attribute field for all subscribers in your Enterprise administrator

account. Associate each subscriber with an On Your Behalf account.

7. Click Next.

8. Expand the My Lists folder to view the lists defined in your account.

Note: If the email address you entered exists in your account, a prompt appears with the option for you to view the existing

subscriber's properties. To continue, enter a different email address for your new subscriber.

9. To add the subscriber to lists, select each list. If you opened the wizard from a particular list, that list is already selected. Deselect it

if desired.

Note: Every subscriber is added to your main All Subscriber list. Leave all other lists deselected if you don’t want to add the

subscriber to any of your accounts' lists.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

10. Click Finish when done choosing lists.

11. Create another individual subscriber if needed.

a. To start with a copy of the profile and preference attributes you defined for the previous subscriber, select Use attribute values

from previous subscriber, and click Create.

b. To start from scratch, click Create.

12. When you’re done creating subscribers, click Finish.

Your new subscriber exists in your All Subscribers list and in any lists you selected in the wizard.

Note: The subscriber isn’t automatically added to groups. If the subscriber's profile or preference attributes would make the

subscriber eligible for a filtered group, refresh the group to add the subscriber.

SEE ALSO:

Profile and Preference Attributes in Email Studio

Imports

Import data into Email Studio to build subscriber lists.

When importing subscribers, the system logs the following results for you to review.

•

Filename of your import file.

•

ID of the list into which the subscribers were imported.

•

Number of subscribers imported.

•

Number of existing subscribers updated with new data.

•

Number of records in your import file that were not imported.

•

Data fields for each subscriber record that could not be imported, along with the reason the import was unsuccessful.

If you chose to be emailed upon completion of the import, the email includes a log file in the same format as your import file, .txt or .csv,

with information about the skipped records. The body of the email itself summarizes the import results.

If you don’t choose to be emailed upon completion of the import, the final dialog box of the Import Subscriber Wizard provides a

summary of results and offers the option of downloading a detailed log file in the same format as your import file, .txt or .csv.

Note: Review the log file to see why certain records were skipped.

Here are some examples of why the application is unable to import a record:

•

The email address is unrecognizable. For example, the @ symbol is missing or the period after the domain name is missing (domaincom

versus domain.com).

•

The data mapped to an attribute with restricted values doesn’t match any of the possible values defined for the attribute.

•

The data mapped to an attribute isn’t the same data type as the attribute. For example, the import file contains $1000 for an attribute

defined as numeric, which accepts numbers only and no symbols.

Import Subscribers from a File

You can import email subscribers to Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement by uploading a CSV file.

Import File Requirements for Marketing Cloud

Add subscribers by placing the data using specific columns before importing. Ensure that the file meets the proper requirements

to successfully import the subscriber data into Email Studio.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Import Microsoft Outlook Contacts

You can use Marketing Cloud Engagement to send emails to the contacts you keep in Microsoft Outlook. In Outlook, prepare and

export the contacts who have given you permission to send marketing messages. Then, import the contact data into Email Studio.

Import Subscribers from a File

You can import email subscribers to Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement by uploading a CSV file.

Note: When you're using a Reseller or Enterprise account enabled with the limited-release Unsubscribe Management feature,

email addresses appearing on the global unsubscribe list or your account-level unsubscribe list aren’t imported.

•

Create a subscriber list.

•

Review the recommendations for configuring and correctly formatting the import file.

1. Choose Subscribers.

2. Open the My Lists folder. If you've created a list subfolder under My Lists in which you want to import the new subscribers, choose

that subfolder.

3. Double-click the desired list or select the list, then choose Open List.

4. Choose Import, which opens the Import Subscriber wizard.

5. Choose Next in the wizard's introductory dialog box.

6. Read the content of the Opt-in Certification dialog box that appears next.

a. If you’ve verified that every subscriber in your import file has agreed to receive emails from you, choose I agree, then Next.

7. Complete the Identify Source File dialog box:

•

Upload Source - The import wizard shows you 2 upload options: Your Computer and FTP. To use a file that you've uploaded to

the FTP site, type the file name in the FTP field. See the Enhanced FTP Guide for details on using the FTP option. If the file you

want to import is on your hard drive, click the Browse button and locate the import file on your computer. Only files on a locally

mapped drive are supported. You can’t upload a file from a UNC path, such as \\ abcfiles\.

•

Data Format - Select either CSV, Tab-Delimited, or Other Delimited. With the Other Delimited option, enter a 1-character

delimiter in the field.

•

File is encrypted- If the advanced feature for encrypted imports is enabled in your account, choose File is encrypted if the

import file you're using has been encrypted.

•

Updated Options - You can add new subscribers and update existing subscribers, add new subscribers but leave existing

subscribers alone, or update existing subscribers without adding new subscribers.

8. Choose Next button in the Import Subscriber Wizard dialog box. The application reads the import file and performs a check for

malware. The amount of time this check takes depends on the amount of data in the file.

9. Complete the 2 sections of the Map Attributes dialog box:

•

Source - The Source section lists the data found in the first row of your import file. Labels that are unavailable have been mapped

to attribute fields by default; labels shown in black font haven’t been mapped. If the first row of your import file is a header row,

you see the column labels from your import file shown in the Source section. Choose First row is header so that the application

doesn’t attempt to import that row as subscriber data. You can view all the data in your import file by the buttons below the

Source section. To go to the next row or back to the row that was displayed, choose Next or choose Previous.

•

Destination - The Destination section lists the profile and preference attributes currently defined in your account, separated into

attributes that have been set up as required and those that haven’t. If the header row in your import file contains labels that

exactly match attribute names, the application has mapped those labels to the attributes for you. The Mapped From column in

the Destination section shows the label from your import file that's been mapped to the attribute shown in the Attribute column.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Use Previous and Next to scroll through the rows of data in your import file. The Destination section updates to show how the

data is mapped to the attribute fields.

10. If a field from your import file hasn’t been mapped for you to an attribute, map it as follows:

a. Click the field in the Source section. (Whether you're viewing the header row labels or a row of actual subscriber data in the

Source section when you click the source field is unimportant. In either case, you're mapping all data from that column of your

import file to the attribute.)

b. Click the corresponding attribute in the Destination section.

c. Choose Map.

The column of data is mapped to the attribute. The value is unavailable in the Source section and the Mapped From value in

the Destination section.

To remove a single mapping, click the attribute row in the Destination section and then choose Unmap.

To remove all current mappings (that is, all values from the Mapped From column in the Destination section), choose Clear

Map.

To undo all changes you've made and return to the original mapping, choose Default Map. The default mappings were in place

when you first opened the Map dialog box. Any fields still displayed in black font rather than gray in the Source section represent

data that isn't imported.

11. When you’re satisfied with your mapping, choose Next. Map any required attributes to fields in your import file before continuing

with the wizard. Use the Confirm Mappings dialog box to view your selected mappings and the number of columns, or fields, and

records, subscribers, in your file that the Email Studio attempts to import.

12. If you want to be notified when the import is complete, choose Email me upon import completion and enter your email address.

Your email notification also includes a log of any subscriber records that couldn’t be imported.

13. Choose Begin. The application begins the process of importing your data. The amount of time that the import takes depends on

the size of the import file.

If the import produces a result file that is 5 MB or larger, the system delivers the file to your enhanced FTP account. This action occurs

even if you chose to receive an email when the import is complete. If you don’t have an enhanced FTP account, you instead see a

message asking you to call Global Support for additional assistance.

If you didn’t choose to be emailed when the import is complete, a dialog box appears when the import is complete. The dialog box

includes the results of the import, and it includes a button that lets you download the results. You can also open the list that you

imported the subscribers into.

Import File Requirements for Marketing Cloud

Add subscribers by placing the data using specific columns before importing. Ensure that the file meets the proper requirements to

successfully import the subscriber data into Email Studio.

Review your import file to ensure that you meet these requirements:

Example: The columns and data shown are a sample of how these columns and data are populated for correct importing of

subscriber data:

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

File Requirements

Follow these guidelines for the import file:

•

Format: When you create the file of subscriber data to be imported into the application, save it as a tab-delimited .txt file or a

comma-delimited .csv file. Many applications, such as Excel, offer these formats.

•

File location: Save the import file on a locally mapped drive. Browse to this file from within the application. Only files on a locally

mapped drive are supported. You cannot upload a file from a UNC path, such as \\ abcfiles\.

•

We recommend a header row for mapping purposes. If the labels in the header row exactly match the names of the attributes in

your account, the application maps the data for you by default. For example, if you're importing a group of Unsubscribed subscribers,

you need a column labeled "Subscriber Status" with "Unsubscribed" in each row.

•

Attribute data type: If you're importing subscriber attributes, ensure that the data in the import file is the same data type as the

attribute field used. The data type can be text, date, or numeric.

Note: If you're importing an attribute that exists in the application, you receive a warning.

•

Use correct values for subscriber preference data: If you're importing subscriber preference data, use one of the following value pairs:

–

Yes or No

–

Y or N

–

True or False

–

1 or 0

•

Delete any columns in the file that are not used in the import. Limiting the import file to only the data that is imported ensures that

the system processes the file as efficiently as possible, saving time.

•

Make the email address the last column in the file. Email address is a required field and every row in your file must contain an email

address. Making the email address the last column in the file ensures that the last column of every row contains data. The system

can process the file more efficiently when the last column of the row contains data. The system can then recognize how many

columns each row has.

•

If in doubt, save the file in the tab-delimited format rather than the comma-delimited format. If any of the values in your file contain

a comma (as part of the value), use the tab-delimited format rather than the comma-delimited format.

•

Save the file in Microsoft Excel. The application is designed to handle files created in Microsoft Excel. If you didn't create your import

file in Excel, avoid most errors by opening the file in Excel and resaving it.

•

Paste into a new spreadsheet: If you have trouble importing a file and can't figure out why, copy all the cells containing data into a

new spreadsheet. When you paste the data into the new spreadsheet, use the Paste Special option and choose to paste just the

values in Excel. Use the supported date formats: Download a list of supported date formats. Use a supported date format when you

upload into a date-type field in a subscriber attribute or data extension.

Note: When you import dates into lists or a data extension, the date must be in the same format as is indicated on your

account. If your user date format is different from the account, you must still use the format of the account.

•

Map the columns in your import file to the attribute names in Email Studio: To map attributes, match the columns in your import

file to the attributes names you created. In other words, map the import column to the attribute. For example, if you have an attribute

in Email Studio called First Name, have a column called First Name. When you import, any value in the First Name column exists in

the First Name attribute.

Import Microsoft Outlook Contacts

You can use Marketing Cloud Engagement to send emails to the contacts you keep in Microsoft Outlook. In Outlook, prepare and export

the contacts who have given you permission to send marketing messages. Then, import the contact data into Email Studio.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Before you import the contact data, make sure that your Outlook contacts’ attributes match the fields that are set up in Email Studio.

•

The CSV import file must include values for every profile and preference attribute that’s marked as required. To simplify field mapping,

change the column headers of your import file to match the attribute field names in Email Studio.

•

All fields with restricted values, such as from a dropdown list, must exactly match an accepted value.

•

In the import file, remove the fields that aren’t needed in Email Studio.

1. Export your Microsoft Outlook contacts into a CSV file.

If you’re asked to install an Outlook translator feature, click Yes.

2. Review the CSV file, and make any necessary changes.

3. Import the CSV file into Email Studio on page 94.

Troubleshoot Microsoft Outlook Contacts Imports

Use these tips to troubleshoot importing Microsoft Outlook contacts in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

SEE ALSO:

Marketing Cloud SFTP Guide

Troubleshoot Microsoft Outlook Contacts Imports

Use these tips to troubleshoot importing Microsoft Outlook contacts in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Errors Importing the Contact File Data

Resolve the most common causes for import errors by saving the export file in Microsoft Excel or by deleting all unneeded columns in

Excel.

Marketing Cloud is designed to handle files created in Microsoft Excel. If you choose an export file format type other than Microsoft Excel

(.xls), follow these steps to avoid errors.

•

Open Microsoft Excel and browse to the CSV or TXT file that Outlook created.

•

In the Open dialog box, choose to view files of all types: *.*

Note: For .txt files, Excel prompts you with the Text Import Wizard. Accept all defaults in this wizard, and Excel opens the file.

•

Save the file in Excel.

•

When Excel warns you that the file may contain features not compatible with its original format, choose to keep the new format,

which leaves out any incompatible features.

•

When you close Excel, you are prompted to save changes. Click No.

Field-Mapping Issues

•

Custom contact fields: Custom contact fields that you create in Outlook are not available in the Outlook import or export wizard.

•

Individual name and address fields: When you enter contact names and addresses in Outlook, Outlook automatically parses the data.

In other words, it splits a contact's name into a title, first name, middle name or initial, last name, and suffix fields. Likewise, Outlook

splits an address field.

•

Full name and address fields: Although Outlook's automatic parsing offers greater granularity to export the pieces of a name or

address separately, this parsing also makes it difficult to map a full name or a full address as a single field.

•

Full name: The full name is not automatically mapped. It is not included by default in the Field list.. To include the full name in the

mapping, drag the full name from the Value box into the Field box.

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Note: Outlook uses the format Last Name First Name for full names.

•

Spaces in full address and name: The full name and full address contain no spaces between the elements. For example, the address

would appear as 20 N Meridian StIndianapolis, IN, with no space between "St" and "Indianapolis." To map over the full address rather

than the pieces of the address, open each contact's record in Outlook and add a space at the end of each address line before including

the address in the mapping.

Search for a Subscriber

Search for a subscriber using enhanced subscriber features in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click All Subscribers and Search.

3. To choose from the supported search fields, click Search where.

4. In the Is equal to field, enter the subscriber's data for the selected search field.

•

Email Address: Enter the subscriber's full email address that matches the email address in the subscriber's record. This field is

not case sensitive.

•

Domain: Enter only the domain portion of the subscriber's email address. For example, yahoo.com.

•

HTML Email preference: Choose Yes or No from the Is equal to field.

•

Subscriber Status: Choose a subscriber status from the Is equal to field.

Note: Returned is the same as Bounced, and Undeliverable is the same as Held.

5. Click Find Now.

6. Select the subscriber in the search results and choose one of the options.

•

View Properties: Open the Subscriber Properties modal for this subscriber.

•

Export: Open the Export to a File wizard to exports this subscriber's data to a file.

•

Delete Subscriber: Deletes the subscriber.

•

Copy: Open the Copy Subscriber modal to add the subscriber to another list.

7. Exit the Search Subscribers modal.

SEE ALSO:

Export a List

Access Subscriber Properties in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Learn how to access subscriber properties in Email Studio.

Access InstructionsSubscriber Properties

Click the list in the workspace to see all subscribers in the list.A list that contains the subscriber

Click the group in the workspace to see all subscribers in the group.A group the subscriber belongs to

The All Subscribers list is the main list of records for the account.

Unsubscribing from All Subscribers removes the subscriber from

All Subscribers list

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Access InstructionsSubscriber Properties

all lists and groups. Reactivated subscribers must be added to each

group and list following reactivation. A subscriber can be

unsubscribed on lists and groups and be active in the All

Subscribers list.

Find subscribers in the All Subscribers workspace by searching or

sorting.

Modify Subscriber Data in Marketing Cloud Engagement

View subscriber data and modify subscribers from subscriber properties in Email Studio. Regardless of where you access subscriber

properties, changes you make take effect throughout the application.

InstructionsField

Update the subscriber's email address on the General tab of the

modal.

Email address

This field shows a list of every action the subscriber has taken with

emails received from you in the past 90 days. If the activity is a

Email history

survey response, view that activity’s details to see the subscriber's

survey responses. The General tab shows how many times an email

to this subscriber has bounced.

To remove a subscriber from all lists and prevent any emails from

being sent, click Unsubscribe from all and enter a description.

The subscriber is placed on your account's master unsubscribe list.

Unsubscribe

Note: This process is the same as when a subscriber

chooses to unsubscribe from all your publications in the

Subscription Center.

Activate a subscriber using Subscriber Properties. This activation

re-enables the subscriber to be added to other lists and groups.

Activate

This field shows a subscriber's data for each profile and preference

attribute. Enter or modify attribute data here.

Attributes

Note: If required, attributes without default values are

added to your account since a subscriber was last modified.

Specify values for these attributes

Note: To see a reactivated subscriber’s membership, refresh

each group that subscriber is added to.

This field show the lists a subscriber belongs to.Lists

•

Details shows when the subscriber was added to or

unsubscribed from this list. If the subscriber has been

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

InstructionsField

unsubscribed from the list, you can reactivate the subscriber's

membership here.

•

Expand the list folders to add the subscriber to one or more

lists.

This field shows groups this subscriber belongs to. Click Activate

to add a subscriber back to this group.

Groups

Export Email Studio Subscribers by Status

You can export subscribers based on subscriber status in Email Studio. This information applies to accounts with the enhanced subscriber

features enabled. To export subscribers, account admin role or permission to access lists is required.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click All Subscribers or Lists and select the name of the list.

3. Click Search.

4. Select Subscriber Status under Search where.

5. Select the subscriber status to export under Is equal to.

6. Click Find Now.

7. Click Export.

8. Click Next.

9. Complete the File and Delivery fields.

•

Export a file of type: Select your supported export file type.

•

Compression: To zip the export file before delivery, click Yes.

Note: Compress files for large lists, especially if you choose the email delivery option.

•

Delivery: Choose how the export file is delivered to you.

–

Via FTP after the export process completes: The export file is delivered to the Export folder in your enhanced FTP account.

–

As an attachment to an email when the export process completes: The export file is emailed to the address that you

enter in the email address text box.

Note: If the export file is over 5 MB, the system delivers it to your enhanced FTP account regardless of what you select. If

you do not have an enhanced FTP account, open a ticket in the Help and Training portal.

10. Click Next.

11. Choose the data to export by moving the desired attributes from the box on the left to the box on the right.

Note: Choose up to approximately 150 data fields per export file. You can’t export the following system field attributes.

•

Add Method

•

Added By

•

Bounce Count

•

Modified Date

100

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

12. Click Export.

Note: How long the export takes depends on the amount of data exported.

13. Click Finish.

SEE ALSO:

Subscribers without Enhanced Subscriber Features

Marketing Cloud SFTP Guide

Update Subscriber Status

Although it is possible to update a subscriber status in Marketing Cloud Engagement, it is discouraged.

1. Export the subscribers and include the email address field and all required fields.

2. Add a column named Status to your import file. Populate this field with the word Unsubscribed or Active for each

subscriber.

3. Import the file to your All subscribers list.

4. Select an update option.

5. Map the email address field, status field, and all required fields.

6. Complete the import process.

7. Ensure that subscribers imported as unsubscribed have been unsubscribed appropriately. Set subscribers imported with an active

status to active on each list that they’ve requested to be resubscribed to.

Warning: Subscribers in an undeliverable status previously bounced an email sent from your account. Changing subscribers

from undeliverable to active can result in high bounce counts in future sends.

Subscribers in an unsubscribed status previously unsubscribed from emails sent from your account. Changing subscribers from

unsubscribed to active can result in high spam complaints in future sends.

When active subscribers are reimported with an active status, their bounce count is set to zero regardless of their original bounce

count.

Delete a Subscriber from Marketing Cloud Engagement

Use Delete Subscriber to delete a subscriber in Email Studio.

To delete a subscriber from Engagement, use Contact Deletion in Contact Builder.

Note: Tracking data for deleted subscribers and contacts are retained in anonymized format and can’t be linked to a specific

record. Tracking and reports show clicks from [email protected] and an IP address of 0.0.0.0 for deleted records.

Warning: To prevent future sends to a subscriber, update the subscriber’s status to Unsubscribed.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Subscribers.

3. Click the name of the list that contains the subscriber to delete.

4. Click Search.

5. To choose from the supported search fields, click Search where.

101

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

6. In the Is equal to field, enter the subscriber's data for the selected search field.

•

Email Address: Enter the subscriber's full email address.

Note: What you enter here must match the email address in the subscriber's record. This field isn’t case-sensitive.

•

Domain: Enter just the domain portion of the subscriber's email address.

Note: For example, yahoo.com.

•

HTML Email preference: The Is equal to field becomes a dropdown list with two options to choose from, Yes or No.

•

Subscriber Status: The Is equal to field becomes a dropdown with the following options to choose from, Active, Returned,

Undeliverable, or Unsubscribed.

Note: Returned is the same as Bounced and Undeliverable is the same as Held.

7. Click Find Now. The application scans your subscribers for one or more matches and displays the results.

8. Select the desired subscriber in the search results.

9. Click Delete Subscriber.

10. To delete the subscriber from the All Subscribers list, check Delete from all lists.

11. Click OK.

12. To exit the Search Subscribers box, click Close.

Note: If you import a list that includes this subscriber or if you manually add the subscriber, the subscriber reappears on your

lists. To ensure that you don’t send any emails to this subscriber in the future, use the Unsubscribe feature instead of deleting

the subscriber. Unsubscribe prevents the subscriber from being imported into the system accidentally.

Import File Requirements for Email Studio

To ensure compatibility with Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement, import files have some detailed requirements.

DescriptionRequirement

When creating the file of subscriber data to be imported into the

application, save it as a tab-delimited .txt file or a comma-delimited

.csv file. Many applications, such as Excel, offer these formats.

Format

Save the import file on a locally mapped drive. Browse to this file

from within the application. Only files on a locally mapped drive

File location

are supported. You cannot upload a file from a UNC path, such as

\\ abcfiles\.

A header row is recommended for mapping purposes. If the labels

in the header row exactly match the names of the attributes in

Header row

your account, the application maps the data by default. For

example, if importing a group of unsubscribed subscribers, you

need a column labeled "Subscriber Status" with "Unsubscribed" in

each row.

102

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionRequirement

If you're importing subscriber attributes, the data in the import file

must be of the same data type, that is, text, date, or numeric, as

the attribute field in the application.

Attribute data type

Note: If you're importing an attribute that exists in the

application, you receive a warning.

If importing subscriber data into attribute fields that restrict the

possible values, the import data must exactly match one of the

values defined as allowable for that attribute.

Attributes with restricted values

If you're importing subscriber preference data, use one of the

following value pairs:

Use correct values for subscriber preference data

•

Yes or No

•

Y or N

•

True or False

•

1 or 0

Limiting the import file to only the data that is imported ensures

that the system processes the file as efficiently as possible, saving

time.

Delete any columns in the file that are not used in the import

Email address is a required field and every row in your file must

contain an email address, making it the last column in the file

Make the email address the last column in the file

ensures that the last column of every row contains data. The system

can process the file more efficiently when the last column of the

row contains data because the system can then recognize how

many columns each row has.

If any of the values in your file contain a comma (as part of the

value), you must use the tab-delimited format rather than the

comma-delimited format.

If in doubt, save the file in the tab-delimited format rather than the

comma-delimited format

The application is designed to handle files created in Microsoft

Excel. If you didn't create the import file in Excel, avoid most errors

by opening the file in Excel and resaving it.

Save the file in Microsoft Excel

If you have trouble importing a file and can't figure out why, copy

all the cells containing data into a new spreadsheet. When you

Paste into a new spreadsheet

paste the data into the new spreadsheet, use the Paste Special

option and choose to paste just the values in Excel.

Download a list of supported date formats. Use a supported date

format when you upload into a date-type field in a subscriber

attribute or data extension.

Use the supported date formats

Note: When you import dates into lists or a data extension,

enter the date in the same format as is indicated on your

account. If the userdate format is different from the account,

use the format of the account.

103

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionRequirement

To map attributes, match the columns in your import file to the

attributes names you created. In other words, map the import

Map the columns in your import file to the attribute names in Email

Studio

column to the attribute. For example, if you have an attribute in

Email Studio called First Name, the import file should contain a

column called First Name. When you import, any value in the First

Name column lives in the First Name attribute.

Lists with Enhanced Subscriber Features

Learn about enhanced subscriber lists in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

A list is a collection of subscribers that receive your communications. All your subscribers belong to the All Subscribers list in your account.

You create as many lists as you need to segment your subscribers so that you can target your email communications. For example, you

can create a list for your monthly newsletter, your weekly coupon offer, and a special announcements list. Once you create a list, you

can send emails using your list or you can create a group from a list to target a more specific segment of subscribers.

When you create a list, you decide whether to make it public. If you make a list public, then a subscriber sees the name of the list in the

Subscription Center and has the option to opt in or -out of the list.

Note: If a subscriber uses the forward button in their email client instead of the Forward to a Friend feature to forward your email,

the subscription center link will still point to the original subscriber's subscription center. For example, if Lee forwards your email

to Ali, and Ali clicks the Subscription Center link in the footer of the email, Ali sees Lee's subscriptions.

You must first create a list, then you can add subscribers to lists in one of two ways:

•

Individually

•

Import a file containing subscriber data

Becoming an effective email marketer requires constant list cleansing and hygiene. In addition, ISPs sometimes use old email addresses

as spam traps aimed at catching commercial e-mailers with old lists. The size of your list is not nearly as important as the quality of the

list, how it was captured, how often it is cleaned, and how well the subscribers respond to messaging. For optimization of email marketing,

it is imperative that lists consist only of opt-in subscribers - those who are anticipating and are interested in your email correspondence.

Subscribers showing no activity, opens, or clicks, for six months or more are very unlikely to respond and are more likely to complain,

causing the potential for ISP blocking. Maintaining your lists is an important part of sending emails.

You can grow your subscriber lists in many different ways. Marketing Cloud Engagement prohibits importing or adding subscribers from

purchased lists, email-appended lists, and email address data obtained by methods other than a direct opt-in. Using these prohibited

list types increases the likelihood of blocked sends due to spamming.

Using Lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Review an example of using a list in Email Studio.

Create a List

Create a list of subscribers who match the attributes you select in Email Studio.

List Properties

View statistics and change the basic properties of a list in Email Studio.

Copy and Move Subscribers

Copy one or more subscribers from one list to another list while retaining them on the original list, or you can move subscribers off

one list to another. Subscribers are always included in All Subscribers in Email Studio. You can copy subscribers from All Subscribers

to another list, but you cannot remove them from All Subscribers.

104

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Import into a List

Import enhanced subscriber data into a list in Email Studio.

Export a List

Export a subscriber list from Email Studio.

Delete a List

Delete an enhanced subscriber list from Email Studio.

Using Lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Review an example of using a list in Email Studio.

Northern Trail Outfitters has a spreadsheet of subscribers who have requested the monthly newsletter. They want to import the information

into a new list in their account. They click Create in the My Lists folder. Northern Trail Outfitters enters a name and a description for the

list and select the public checkbox so that subscribers can manage their membership in the list using the subscription center. They click

Select a Campaign to associate the list to a campaign they already created. They click Next.

They select Send welcome Email to welcome subscribers added via the Subscription Center or Web Collect. They click Save.

Northern Trail Outfitters click Import from actions since they have a .csv file of subscribers.

Northern Trail Outfitters can now use this list in an email send or to create a group.

Create a List

Create a list of subscribers who match the attributes you select in Email Studio.

Before you create a list, decide:

•

Whether you're going to require subscribers to confirm their email address after they subscribe. If so, create the email message

before creating the list, or create a text-only message when you create the list.

•

Whether you're going to attach a welcome email to this list. A welcome email is what subscribers receive when they subscribe to

your list. You can assign a welcome email to this list during list creation, which requires you to create an email before creating the

list, or you can assign the welcome email later by using Manage Welcome Email.

Note: Adding a Welcome Email to a list is no longer supported starting in the second half of 2020. Use Journey Builder to

create personalized, automated multi-channel campaigns.

Note: Lists that you create in your Enterprise administrator account are accessible to your On Your Behalf channel members. On

Your Behalf channel members can’t create lists, but can add subscribers to them.

1. In Email Studio, on the Subscribers tab, select Lists.

2. Click Create.

3. Complete the Define Name & Location section.

•

Name: This name identifies the list when sending. If you make this list public, this name appears in the Subscription Center. Your

list name can’t contain the # symbol or be longer than 50 characters.

•

Public: Selecting the public option results in this list being displayed in the Subscription Center. A subscriber can opt in or opt

out of any public list.

•

External Key: Enter a unique identifier that developers can use in their API calls to access objects programmatically.

•

Description: This description appears in the list workspace.

•

Location: Select the list folder location.

•

Campaign Association: Associate the list to a campaign. To start a new campaign, click Create Campaign.

105

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

4. Click Next.

5. Optionally, complete the Set Double Opt-in section.

a. If you want subscribers to provide confirmation of their email address when they subscribe to your list, select the Require

subscribers to provide confirmation of valid email address checkbox.

b. Select the Confirmation Email. The email must contain the double opt-in link URL. The substitution string to insert the link in

your email is %%double_opt_in_url%%.

c. Optionally, complete the Landing Page section by selecting an opt-in landing page to display to subscribers when the double

opt-in link URL is clicked in your email.

6. Click Next.

7. Optionally, complete the Select Welcome Email section.

a. If you want to welcome subscribers to this list, select Send welcome email.

b. Select the Welcome Email.

c. Select whether to associate a Send Classification to the welcome email send. This option may not be enabled in your account.

8. Click Finish.

Configure a List for a Welcome Email

You can configure a subscriber list for Welcome Email messages in Email Studio.

Set a List to Public

Selecting the Public option in Email Studio will result in this list being displayed in the Subscription Center. A subscriber can opt-in

or opt-out of any public list.

Configure a List for a Welcome Email

You can configure a subscriber list for Welcome Email messages in Email Studio.

Note: Adding a Welcome Email to a list is no longer supported starting in the second half of 2020. Use Journey Builder to create

personalized, automated multi-channel campaigns.

Before you can assign a welcome email to a list, you must first create the email. You can change which email is assigned to a list at any

time. This feature may not be enabled in your account, contact your representative.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Lists.

3. Click the name of the list to assign a welcome email to.

4. Click Properties.

5. Click Select.

6. Select the email to send as a welcome email.

7. Click OK.

The welcome email is now assigned to your list and sends when subscribers join via the Subscription Center or Web Collect.

Set a List to Public

Selecting the Public option in Email Studio will result in this list being displayed in the Subscription Center. A subscriber can opt-in or

opt-out of any public list.

106

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Lists.

3. Select the name of the list to set to public.

4. Click Properties.

5. Select the checkbox for Public.

List Properties

View statistics and change the basic properties of a list in Email Studio.

OptionsDescriptionField

To change the name of the lists or the lists

description, make your modifications to the

text box at the top of the Properties tab.

The list name displays in the list workspace

and in sends.

List name and description

Select the plus button, select the radio

button for the appropriate campaign, and

To associate the list with a campaign.Campaign Association

select OK. Or click Create Campaign to

create a campaign.

To change the external key of the list, make

your modifications to the text box and click

Done.

The external key is a unique identifier for the

list. This value is used by developers in their

API calls to access the list programmatically.

External Key

The unique identifier created by the

application.

List ID

These dates are recorded.Date on which this list was created and the

date when it was last modified.

Created and Last Modified

To relocate the list, click the Change button,

which opens Select Location showing your

List folder in which this list is located.Location

list folder structure. Click the desired folder

and click OK.

Type is set by the application.All lists are standard lists.Type

Click the checkbox to set the list to public.The public option results in this list being

displayed in the Subscription Center. A

Public

subscriber can opt in or opt out of any

public list.

To add subscribers right from the properties

tab, click Add Subscribers and select

Number of subscribers who currently

belong to this list.

Size

Import or Manually. To view more details

about the lists membership, click the

Subscriber tab. The Tracking tab shows list

composition, provides access to reports, and

recent sends.

107

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

OptionsDescriptionField

Click Edit, select the Require subscribers to

provide confirmation of valid email address

Double opt-in requires your subscribers to

confirm their email address.

Double Opt-in Behavior

checkbox, and choose the email that

contains the double opt-in link. Optional,

select a Marketing Cloud Engagement or

external opt-in landing page to display to

subscribers when the double opt-in link URL

is clicked in your email.

Click Edit, select the Send Welcome Email

checkbox, and select the welcome email to

send to subscribers.

A welcome email is the email a new

subscriber receives after joining the list.

Welcome Email

Adding a Welcome Email to a list is no

longer supported starting in the second half

of 2020. Use Journey Builder to create

personalized, automated multichannel

campaigns.

Copy and Move Subscribers

Copy one or more subscribers from one list to another list while retaining them on the original list, or you can move subscribers off one

list to another. Subscribers are always included in All Subscribers in Email Studio. You can copy subscribers from All Subscribers to another

list, but you cannot remove them from All Subscribers.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Lists.

3. Select the name of the list.

4. Select the checkbox next to the subscribers who you want to add to another list.

To select the entire list, select Email Address and then click Copy.

5. Select the list to add these subscribers to.

6. Check the appropriate boxes.

•

Maintain subscriber status from the originating list when you move/copy the subscriber to the destination list. If you do not

check this list, the subscribers are added to the destination list with a status of Active.

•

If you want to add all the subscribers on the list, select the Move/copy each subscriber on the source list checkbox.

7. Click the appropriate button:

•

Move: Choose Move if you want to remove the subscribers from the current list and add them to the selected list.

•

Copy: Choose Copy if you want the subscribers to exist on both the current list and on the selected list.

8. Click OK.

Import into a List

Import enhanced subscriber data into a list in Email Studio.

108

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Lists.

3. Under Actions click Import for the list to import into.

4. Click Next in the wizard's introductory dialog box.

5. Read the content of the Opt-in Certification dialog box that appears next. If you have verified that every subscriber in your import

file has agreed to receive emails from you, select the I agree checkbox, and click Next.

6. Complete the Identify Source File dialog box.

DescriptionField

The import wizard shows you two upload options: Your Computer and FTP. To use a file that

you've uploaded to the FTP site, type the filename in the FTP field. If the file you want to

Upload Source

import is on your hard drive, click the Browse button and locate the import file on your

computer. Only files on a locally mapped drive are supported ( C:\, D:\, etc.). You cannot

upload a file from a UNC path (such as \\ abcfiles\).

Select one of the following: The CSV radio button The Tab Delimited radio button The Other

Delimited radio button. If you select this value, you must enter a 1-character delimiter in the

field.

Data Format

If the advanced feature for encrypted imports is enabled in your account, you'll see this check

box. Select the check box if the import file you're using has been encrypted.

File is encrypted

Add new subscribers and update subscribers that exist Add new subscribers but do not

update subscribers that exist Update existing subscribers but do not add subscribers that do

not exist

Updated Options

You can select a date format from the drop-down menu in this section to use as part of the

import. Choose the date format that most closely matches the region from which you are

conducting the import.

Date Format

Select the type of file encoding you want to use. If no type is selected, the system defaults

to UTF-8.

File Encoding

7. Click the Next button in the Import Subscriber Wizard dialog box. The application reads the import file, which may take several

moments depending on the size of the file. The application will then perform a check for malware and prevent uploading of infected

files.

Note: The data in the import file is not yet brought into your account.

8. The Map Attributes dialog box appears next. This dialog box consists of two sections:

Source

The Source section lists the data found in the first row of your import file. Labels that are grayed out have been mapped to

attribute fields by default; labels shown in black font have not been mapped. If the first row of your import file is a header row,

you'll see the column labels from your import file shown in the Source section. In this case, make sure that the First row is header

check box is selected so that the application does not attempt to import that row as subscriber data. You can view all the data

in your import file by the buttons below the Source section. Click the Next button below the Source section to view the next

row of data in your file. Click Previous to go back to the row that was displayed.

109

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Destination

The Destination section lists the profile and preference attributes currently defined in your account, separated into those that

have been set up as required and those that have not. If the header row in your import file contains labels that exactly match

attribute names, the application has mapped those labels to the attributes for you. The Mapped From column in the Destination

section shows the label from your import file that's been mapped to the attribute shown in the Attribute column. As you scroll

through the rows of data in your import file by using the Previous and Next buttons, the Destination section updates to show

how the data is mapped to the attribute fields.

9. If a field from your import file has not been mapped for you to an attribute, map it as follows:

•

Click the field in the Source section. (Whether you're viewing the header row labels or a row of actual subscriber data in the

Source section when you click the source field is unimportant. In either case, you're mapping all data from that row of your

import file to the attribute.)

•

Click the corresponding attribute in the Destination section.

•

Click the Map button.

Note: The column of data is now mapped to the attribute, as indicated by the grayed-out value in the Source section

and the Mapped From value in the Destination section.

You also have these additional options:

–

Remove a single mapping: To unmap an attribute from the import file field to which it's currently mapped, click the attribute

row in the Destination section and then click the Unmap button.

–

Remove all current mappings: If you want to remove all the current mappings (that is, delete all values from the Mapped

From column in the Destination section), click the Clear Map button.

–

Return to the original mappings: If you want to undo all changes you've made to the default mappings (the mappings that

were in place when you first opened this dialog box), click the Default Map button.

Any fields still displayed in black font rather than gray in the Source section represent data that isn't imported.

10. When satisfied with your mappings, click the Next button at the bottom of the dialog box.

Note: Any attributes that have been defined as required must be mapped to fields in your import file. You can't continue

with the wizard until these fields are mapped.

11. The Confirm Mappings dialog box appears next, summarizing your selected mappings and the number of columns (fields) and

records (subscribers) in your file that the application attempts to import. If you want to be notified when the import is complete,

select the Email me upon import completion check box and enter your email address in the Email address field. Your

email notification also includes a log of any subscriber records that could not be imported.

12. Click the Begin button. The application begins the process of importing your data. How long the import takes depends on the size

of your import file.

13. The final dialog box of the wizard appears.

•

If you chose to be emailed upon completion, this dialog box appears immediately and confirms that the import has begun. Click

Finish to exit the wizard. After the import is completed, you'll receive an email with the results of the import (if the file does not

exceed 5MB in size. If the export file is over 5 MB in size, the system delivers it to your enhanced FTP account regardless of what you

select here. If you do not have an enhanced FTP account, the system returns a message saying that you should call global support.)

•

If you did not request an email upon completion, the dialog box appears after the import process has been completed. The text of

the dialog box shows you the results of the import and includes a Download report button for you to view the details behind the

records that could not be imported. Click Download report to open the log file showing the results. You also have the option of

opening the list into which you imported the new subscribers. Select the Take me to my list check box, and the list opens when you

click Finish.

110

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Note: If you imported using an Enterprise account, the email address appears on the global unsubscribe list or on your account-level

unsubscribe list.

Export a List

Export a subscriber list from Email Studio.

When exporting a list, note which system fields are exportable and which are not.

You can export the following fields:

•

Subscriber key, if enabled in your account

•

Email Address

•

Created Date

•

Unsubscribe Reason

•

Unsubscribe Date

•

HTML Email

You cannot export the following fields:

•

Add Method

•

Added By

•

Bounce Count

•

Modified Date

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Select the checkbox next to the list.

3. Click Export.

4. Click Next.

5. Complete the File and Delivery dialog box.

Note: Use FTP for lists greater that 850 subscribers.

6. Click Next.

7. Choose the data to export by moving the desired attributes from the box on the left to the box on the right. You can choose up to

a limit of approximately 150 data fields per export file. Click the right double-arrow button if you want to move all the attributes into

the box on the right. Or click a single attribute on the left and then click the right single-arrow button to move it into the box on the

right. The other two arrow buttons allow you to deselect attributes.

8. Click Export. The application begins the process of exporting the data into a file. How long the export takes depends on the amount

of data to be exported.

9. Click Finish.

•

If you chose to be emailed upon completion: This dialog box appears immediately and confirms that the export process has

begun. Click Finish. After the export file is built, you'll receive an email with the file in the format you chose.

•

If you chose the HTTP (browser download option: The dialog box appears after the export process has been completed. Click

Download File to open the file in your browser. Click Finish.

111

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Delete a List

Delete an enhanced subscriber list from Email Studio.

From the parent Enterprise account level, you can delete the list and delete all the subscribers from the account. If you chose to delete

the subscribers; the subscribers are removed from the All Subscribers lists and all other lists, and the email application no longer tracks

email activity for the subscribers. If you didn’t choose to delete the subscribers; the subscribers are still in your All Subscribers list and all

other lists, and the email application continues to track email activity for the subscribers.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Lists.

3. Select the checkbox next to the name of the list to delete.

4. Click Delete.

When working in the parent account, if you want to also delete the subscribers that belong to the list, click Delete Subscribers in

"LIST NAME". If you want to keep the subscribers in your account, don’t select this check box.

5. Click Delete.

Groups with Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The information in this document applies to accounts with the enhanced subscriber features. Refer to Groups with Classic Subscriber

Features if your account doesn’t have enhanced subscriber features enabled in Email Studio.

A group is a subset of subscribers. There are two types of groups:

•

Filtered Group

•

Random Group

Filtered groups are segments of lists. You create a filtered group by filtering on profile attributes, preference attributes, filters, and

measures. To refresh the group, you can use a group refresh activity or refresh the group manually. Subscribers who opt-out of sends

from a group are retained in refreshed group as unsubscribed even if they no longer match the rules for the group.

Random groups are segments of lists or filtered groups or other random groups. You create a random group by splitting a subscriber

list or filtered group. Only 12 random groups can be created from a list or filtered group.

Use a group to create a targeted list of subscribers. For example, if you want to send an email to all the males in a list, you can create a

group of just the males.

You can also use a group to create a random sample of subscribers. For example, if you want to see how subscribers react to a new email

template, you can generate a random sample of subscribers to send to and track the results.

Create a Filtered Group in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a filtered group by filtering subscribers by profile attributes, preference attributes, filters, and measures in Email Studio.

Groups Scenario for Marketing Cloud Engagement

See an example of groups used in Email Studio.

Create a Group of Randomly Selected Subscribers

Split up subscribers from a selected list and place the subscribers into random groups in Email Studio. Create as many as 12 groups

at a time.

Refresh a Filtered Group

In Marketing Cloud Engagement, Email Studio doesn’t update groups for newly added or modified subscribers. If the subscriber's

profile or preference attributes makes the subscriber eligible for a filtered group, refresh the group to add the subscriber.

112

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Modify a Group in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Modify a subscriber group in Email Studio. The Group Details section is where you can view statistics about the group and change

properties of the group. You can even redefine the attribute settings with which a filtered group was defined.

Copy Marketing Cloud Engagement Subscribers from a Group to a List

Copy Email Studio subscribers, without enhanced subscriber features, from a group to a list while keeping them on the group.

Delete a Group from Marketing Cloud Engagement

Delete an Enhanced Subscriber Features group in Email Studio without deleting any of the subscribers who belong to the group.

Export a Group from Marketing Cloud Engagement

Export selected Email Studio subscriber data from a group to a file and export a single subscriber's data, from the Search Subscribers

feature.

Send to Groups in Email Studio

Send Subscribers to Groups with enhanced subscriber features in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Create a Filtered Group in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a filtered group by filtering subscribers by profile attributes, preference attributes, filters, and measures in Email Studio.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Groups.

3. Click Create.

4. Select Filtered Group.

5. Click Ok.

6. Select a source list of subscribers to filter.

7. Click Ok.

8. Drag and drop Profile & Preference Attributes, Filters, and/or Measure from the left column to the Create Filter canvas. Only 20 rules

can be used to create the filter. Use the profile and preference attribute tables as a reference to building out your filter.

Note: Be sure to choose an operator that makes sense with the type of attribute you chose. For example, do not use the less

than the operator with a text attribute. For attributes with type equal to date, only the following operators are supported: is

equal to, is not equal to, is greater than and is less than.

9. Select an AND or OR operator. You can group your criteria by hovering over the grouping operator so that it turns a darker blue and

then click to change the operator.

Note: If you choose AND, the subscriber must meet all criteria to be included in the group. If you choose OR, the subscriber

must meet one of the criteria, but not all criteria, in order to be included in the group.

10. Click Save & Build.

11. Enter a Name for the group.

12. Enter a Description for the group.

13. Select a folder in which to store the group. You can select New Folder to create a folder to store the group.

14. Click Save.

113

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Filter Group Reference for Marketing Cloud Engagement

Use profile and preference attributes in a filtered group by filtering subscribers by profile attributes, preference attributes, filters, and

measures in Email Studio.

Filter Group Reference for Marketing Cloud Engagement

Use profile and preference attributes in a filtered group by filtering subscribers by profile attributes, preference attributes, filters, and

measures in Email Studio.

Profile Attributes

DescriptionFunction

Subscribers with an attribute definition that exactly matches the

value are included in the group. You can choose 1 value only.

is equal to

Subscribers with an attribute definition that does not match the

value are included in the group. You can choose 1 value only.

is not equal to

Use this operator when the attribute is a numeric value. Subscribers

with an attribute definition greater than, greater than or equal to

the value are included in the group.

is greater than, is greater than equal to

Use this operator when the attribute is a numeric value. Subscribers

with an attribute definition less than, less than or equal to the value

are included in the group.

is less than, is less than equal to

The application looks for attribute values that begin with the exact

sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison value.

Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters.

begins with

The application looks for attribute values that include or exclude

the exact sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison

value. Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters.

contains, does not contain

The application looks for attribute values that end with the exact

sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison value.

Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters.

ends with

Subscribers with an attribute definition that matches one of the

values you define in a comma delimited string of values are

exists in

included in the group. The exists in operator looks for a partial

match of the entire value. For example, if your match criteria is

north, the exists in operator returns subscribers with north,

northwest, and northeast attribute values, but not subscribers with

south, southwest, and southeast attribute values.

Subscribers with an attribute definition that do not match any of

the values you define in a comma delimited string of values are

does not exist in

included in the group. This operator is not applicable when

choosing an attribute with restricted values, as you can select only

one of the restricted values as the comparison value.

114

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionFunction

To filter for a blank value select is empty or is not empty.is empty, is not empty

Preference Attributes

DescriptionFunction

The application looks for of either a true or false value. Your only

options are True and False.

Groups Scenario for Marketing Cloud Engagement

See an example of groups used in Email Studio.

Example: Northern Trail Outfitters created several lists of subscribers, and would now like create a group to send an email to all

the males in the list. They open the Create Subscriber Group wizard and choose Filtered Group because they want to target a

specific gender.

After clicking Ok, the Select a Source page appears. Northern Trail Outfitters selects the Indiana Subscribers list.

Next they drag the Gender attribute to the Create Filter canvas and click Save & Build.

They enter a name and description that reminds them of the group's purpose and click Save.

They can now send targeted emails to the group.

Create a Group of Randomly Selected Subscribers

Split up subscribers from a selected list and place the subscribers into random groups in Email Studio. Create as many as 12 groups at

a time.

1. In Email Studio, on the Subscribers tab, click Groups.

2. Click Create.

115

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

3. Select Random Group.

4. Click Ok.

5. Select a source list of subscribers to split.

6. Click Ok.

7. Click Add Group.

a. Enter a name for the group.

b. In the Group Size field, enter a percentage or the number of subscribers in the list to randomly add to this group.

c. To change the location the group is saved to, click Change Location and select a folder in which to store the group.

8. Repeat step 7 to create up to 12 additional splits.

9. To create a group from the remaining subscribers, click Add Remainder..

10. Click Save & Build.

Refresh a Filtered Group

In Marketing Cloud Engagement, Email Studio doesn’t update groups for newly added or modified subscribers. If the subscriber's profile

or preference attributes makes the subscriber eligible for a filtered group, refresh the group to add the subscriber.

Use the Automation Studio group refresh activity or refresh the manually.

1. Select the checkbox next to the filtered group to refresh.

2. Click Refresh under Actions.

3. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box that appears. The application scans all subscriber data and rebuilds the group. View the

subscriber count displayed in the group workspace to see how many subscribers now belong to the group.

Note: Group refreshes will fail if the group is based on a data type attribute that has a date earlier than January 1, 1900 or

greater than December 21, 2079. Subscribers who opt-out of sends from a group are retained in refreshed group as unsubscribed

even if they no longer match the rules for the group.

Modify a Group in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Modify a subscriber group in Email Studio. The Group Details section is where you can view statistics about the group and change

properties of the group. You can even redefine the attribute settings with which a filtered group was defined.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Groups.

3. Select the group name in the group workspace.

4. Click Properties.

Group Properties Tab Fields for Marketing Cloud Engagement

The group properties tab within Email Studio contains fields to provide group details.

Group Properties Tab Fields for Marketing Cloud Engagement

The group properties tab within Email Studio contains fields to provide group details.

The group properties tab contains these fields:

116

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

OptionsDescriptionField

To change the name of the group or the

group description, make your modifications

The group name displays in the group

workspace and in the Email Send wizard.

Group name and description

to the text box at the top of the Properties

tab. When you click Done, your change

takes effect.

To change the external key of the group,

make your modifications to the text box and

click Done.

The external key is a unique identifier for the

group. This value is used by developers in

their API calls to access the group

programmatically.

External Key

These dates are recorded.Date on which this group was created and

the date when it was modified or refreshed.

Created and Last Modified

To relocate the group, click Change, which

opens Select Location showing your group

Group folder in which this group is located.Location

folder structure. Click the desired folder and

click Ok. If you want to create a folder for

this group, click New in the Move Group

dialog box to open the Create New Folder

dialog box. When you return to the Move

Group dialog box, the group folder structure

displayed refreshes to show your new folder.

The two types are: Filtered or Random.The type of group that was created.Type

For Filtered groups, click edit to modify the

filter. For Random groups, splits cannot be

edited and this option does not display.

Use to edit this group's filter.Edit

To view more details about the group

membership, click the Subscriber tab. The

Number of subscribers who currently

belong to this group.

Size

Tracking tab display subscriber status,

including how many have unsubscribed,

under group composition. You also have

access to reports, and recent sends from the

Tracking tab.

Copy Marketing Cloud Engagement Subscribers from a Group to a List

Copy Email Studio subscribers, without enhanced subscriber features, from a group to a list while keeping them on the group.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Groups.

3. Select the name of the group.

4. Select the subscriber or subscribers to add to a list and click Copy.

5. Select a list to add the subscribers to.

6. Check the appropriate boxes.

117

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Note: Maintain subscriber status from the originating list when you move or copy the subscriber to the destination list. If you

don’t check this list, the moved or copied subscribers are added to the destination list with a status of Active.

If you want to add all of the subscribers on the list from which you opened this dialog box, select Copy all subscriber on the source

list.

7. Click Copy.

8. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box that appears after the copy is complete.

Delete a Group from Marketing Cloud Engagement

Delete an Enhanced Subscriber Features group in Email Studio without deleting any of the subscribers who belong to the group.

You can delete a group which doesn’t delete any of the subscribers who belong to the group.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Groups.

3. Select the group to delete.

4. Click Delete.

5. Click the checkbox to confirm you would like to delete the group from your account.

6. Click Delete.

Export a Group from Marketing Cloud Engagement

Export selected Email Studio subscriber data from a group to a file and export a single subscriber's data, from the Search Subscribers

feature.

You can export selected subscriber data from a group to a comma-separated CSV file, tab-delimited TXT file, or XML file. You can also

export a single subscriber's data, from the Search Subscribers feature.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Groups.

3. Click Export under Actions next to the group to export.

4. Click Next.

5. Complete these fields of the File and Delivery dialog:

•

Export a file of type - Select one of the supported export file types.

•

Compression - If you want the resulting export file to be zipped prior to delivery, click Yes. Compressing the file is recommended

for large groups, especially if you choose the email delivery option.

•

Delivery - Choose how you want the export file to be delivered to you:

•

Via FTP after the export process completes: The export file is delivered to the Export folder in your enhanced FTP account.

•

As an attachment to an email when the export process completes: The export file is emailed to the address that you enter in the

email address text box.

Note: If the export file is over 5 MB, the system delivers it to your enhanced FTP account regardless of what you select here.

If you do not have an enhanced FTP account, the system returns a message saying that you should call global support.

6. Click Next.

7. Choose the data to export by moving the desired attributes from the left pane to the right pane. You can choose up to approximately

150 data fields per export file. Click the right double-arrow button if you want to move all the attributes into the box on the right.

118

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

You can also click a single attribute on the left pane and then click the right single-arrow button to move it to the right pane. The

other two arrow buttons allow you to deselect attributes or move attributes from the right pane to the left pane.

8. Click Export.

The application begins the process of exporting the data into a file. How long the export takes depends on the amount of data to

be exported.

9. The final dialog box of the wizard appears.

•

If you chose to be emailed upon completion: This dialog box appears immediately and confirms that the export process has

begun. Click Finish to exit the wizard. After the export file has been built, you'll receive an email with the file in the format you

chose.

•

If you chose the HTTP browser download option: The dialog box appears after the export process has been completed. Click

Download File in the dialog box to open the file in your browser. Click Finish after downloading the file to exit the wizard.

When exporting a group, note which fields are exportable and which are not.

Table 2: System Fields

You cannot exportYou can export:

Add MethodSubscriber key (if enabled in your account)

Added ByEmail Address

Bounce CountCreated Date

Modified DateUnsubscribe Reason

Unsubscribe Date

HTML Email

Send to Groups in Email Studio

Send Subscribers to Groups with enhanced subscriber features in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Groups.

3. You can click Send from:

a. Select each list to send to and click Send.

b. Under Actions click Send.

c. Click the name of a group and click Send.

Data Extensions with Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Use data extensions with Email Studio to satisfy the need for flexible data storage. Using data extensions requires an understanding of

relational database structures and other technical expertise.

A standard data extension is a table within the application database that contains your data. Usually, the data you keep in a data extension

relates to a subscriber but doesn’t fit in the subscriber profile and preference attributes for one of the following reasons: Filtered data

extensions are segments of standard data extensions. You create a filtered data extension by filtering on fields, filters, and measures.

119

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Random data extensions are segments of standard data extensions. You create a random data extension by splitting standard data

extensions, a filtered data extension, or a random data extension. Only 12 random data extensions can be created at one time.

•

A subscriber can have varying numbers of values. For example, a subscriber's first name fits as a subscriber attribute because you

probably refer to a subscriber by only one first name. Or a list of the subscriber's transactions in the last month doesn’t fit well because

it’s difficult to predict how many transactions a subscriber has completed in the last month.

•

The information is related to the subscriber through a third piece of information. For example, you maintain the subscriber's preferred

airport code as a subscriber attribute, but maintain the name of the airport in a data extension.

Why Use a Data Extension

Use a data extension to contain your data that relates to subscribers but that doesn't fit into the subscriber attributes. With data extensions,

you can:

•

Import information from other systems into Email Studio.

•

Send a message to subscribers in a data extension.

•

Exclude subscribers in a data extension from a message send.

•

Include customer-specific information from a data extension in a message.

•

Collect the subscriber information of people who trigger a triggered send.

•

Create dynamic content in an email content area.

Create a Data Extension in Email Studio (Enhanced)

Create a data extension in Email Studio.

Create a Data Extension from an Existing Data Extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a data extension from an existing data extension in Email Studio. Creating a data extension from an existing data extension

allows you to copy the fields and their configurations but doesn’t copy the data stored in the data extension itself.

120

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a Data Extension from a Template

Create a data extension with a data extension template. A few data extension templates are provided with Email Studio to enable

specific use cases, such as data extensions used in coupon-based solutions.

Create a Filtered Data Extension

Create a filtered data extension in Email Studio. A filtered data extension is generated by filtering fields, filters, and measures. Filtered

data extension takes on the same characteristics as the source data extension. To update a filtered data extension to sendable or

non-sendable, change the source data extension to sendable or non-sendable. To remove data from a filtered data extension, remove

the data from the source data extension and then refresh the filtered data extension.

Refresh a Filtered Data Extension

Newly added or modified records are not automatically added to filtered data extensions. To add new records to a data extension,

refresh the filtered data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Create a Data Extension That Contains Randomly Selected Subscribers

A random data extension splits up subscribers from a selected standard data extension and places the subscribers into new data

extensions in Email Studio. You can create as many as 12 data extensions at a time.

Data Extension Properties for Marketing Cloud Engagement

View statistics about the data extension and change properties of the data extension in the data extension details section of Email

Studio. To access data extension properties, select the data extension name.

Set Enterprise 2.0 Shared Data Extension Permissions

Data Extension Permissions is a Marketing Cloud Engagement tool that controls business unit access to shared data extensions in

Email Studio. By checking the box next to a permission, you can enable or disable that permission.

Import into a Data Extension

Import subscriber data into a data extension in Email Studio.

View Data Extension Records

View data extension records in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Export a Data Extension

Export subscribers from Email studio to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension.

Send to Subscribers in a Data Extension

You can use Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement to send a message to subscribers in a data extension.

View Tracking for Data Extensions

View tracking for data extensions in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Data Relationships

A data relationship in Email Studio specifies that a column in one data extension contains the same kind of information as a column

in another data extension or in a subscriber attribute. Use a data relationship to relate two data extensions based on a common

column contained in both data extensions. You can then apply a filter to the two data extensions and create a new segment of data.

Data Extension Error Messages

Use this information to resolve errors involving data extensions in Email Studio.

Data Extensions Data Types in Email Studio

You can select a data type from these choices when you create a column in an Email Studio data extension.

Operators

Review this list of operators for use with profile and preference attributes in data extensions for Email Studio.

121

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a Data Extension in Email Studio (Enhanced)

Create a data extension in Email Studio.

Important: You can’t include the following characters in the name and field name of a data extension: ! @ # $ % ’ ^ * ( ) = { } [ ]

\ . < > / " : ? | , &

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Data Extensions.

3. Click the Create button. You have three options:

•

Standard Data Extension: A standard data extension allows you to create custom fields to store data.

•

Filtered Data Extension: A filtered data extension is generated by filtering fields, measures, and filters for sendable data extensions

from a source data extension.

•

Random Data Extension: A random data extension allows you to randomly select subscribers from a source data extension.

4. Click Standard Data Extension.

5. Click OK.

6. Complete the information in the Properties section:

•

Creation Method - The method used to create the data extension. Select Create from New.

•

Name - The name of the data extension. Use this name to identify the data extension in Email Studio.

•

External Key - A unique value that identifies the data extension. Use this value to identify the data extension with an API call.

•

Description - A description of the data extension, optional. Use this description to further help identify the data extension within

Email Studio.

•

Location - To store the data extension in a different folder location, optional, select Change Location.

•

Is Sendable - Indicates whether you intend this data extension to have messages sent to it. This checkbox determines whether

the data extension is available to use as part of sends.

•

Is Testable - If you select Is Sendable, this field indicates whether you intend this data extension to have test messages sent to

it.

•

Campaign Association- To associate a data extension used for sending with a Campaign, select the radio button for the appropriate

Campaign, optional.

7. Click Next.

8. Optionally, turn on Retention Settings. If you have this feature enabled, the data admin user for your account can enable or change

the data retention policy for new data extensions. Contact your account administrator to activate the data retention policy feature.

By default, the data extension retention policy deletes unused data extensions after 6 months. The deletion process runs nightly.

Set these options when creating the data extension. You can’t modify the delete settings for an existing data extension. You can

modify the deletion period for existing data extension.

Data Retention Options:

•

Retention Setting - Select On to ensure that the application deletes all records in the data extension at the same time.

–

Delete:

•

Individual Records - When this option is selected, the data extension is retained but the individual records inside the

data extension are deleted.

•

All Records - When this option is selected, the data extension is retained but the records inside the data extension are

deleted.

122

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

All Records and Data Extension - When this option is selected, the entire data extension and the records inside the data

extension are deleted.

–

Period:

•

After: Enter the number of days after the data extension was created to wait before deleting.

•

Reset period on import: To extend the retention date following a new import.

•

On: Select a specific date to delete.

9. Click Next.

10. Include a field with the Email Address data type for email sends or a Phone data type for SMS sends in sendable data extensions

with no other information that relates to an existing subscriber. If the Email Address or Phone data types aren’t present, the subscriber

receives no messages sent using the data extension.

•

Primary Key - Determines whether the system considers this field to be the primary key of the table. If you select this checkbox,

the system requires a unique value in this field so it can use this field to uniquely identify a row. If you select this checkbox for

more than one column, then the combination of the values in the columns must be unique. If you don’t select this checkbox,

the system doesn’t require the value in this field to be unique. When a Primary Key field is configured with a default value, the

default value isn’t applied during imports. After a primary key has been created within a Data Extension, it can’t be modified. To

modify an existing primary key, create another data extension. New primary keys can still be added to existing dat extensions.

•

Name - The name of the column in the data extension.

•

Data Type - The data type of the contents of the field. Data type can’t be changed after the data extension is created. Valid values

include:

–

Text - A combination of letters, numbers, and spaces.

–

Number - An integer. Decimal values aren’t supported.

–

Date - A system date. You can use an AMPscript function to format this value when you present it in a message. All time is

stored in Central Standard Time and dates are stored in the format MM/DD/YYYY.

–

Boolean - A 0 or 1 value.

–

EmailAddress - A field of this type must exist in order for you to send an email to a data extension. The system doesn’t verify

that the value in this field is a valid email address when importing data.

–

Phone - This data type accepts any string with 10 or 11 digits in it and strips out non-digit characters.

–

Decimal - A number with a decimal point.

•

Length - Maximum number of characters, including spaces, you can import into this column. Don’t use empty lengths for Text

data types unless necessary. If you select the Decimal data type, you specify both the total maximum number of characters and

how many of the total appear after the decimal point. For example, if you define a decimal field with a length of 18.2, the two

characters that appear after the decimal point are included in the 18 character total limit. Up to 10 characters are allowed for

the Decimal Data type when creating a Data Filters from a Data Extension.

•

Nullable - Determines whether this column can be empty.

•

Default Value - If you specify a default value for this field, this value is used for all records who don’t have a value entered for the

field.

11. Click Create.

123

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Manage Policies for an Email Studio Data Extension

If you have this feature enabled in Email Studio, the admin user for your account can allow or disallow users to delete a data extension,

modify existing fields in a data extension, or add more fields to a data extension. Even if a user’s permission allows them to delete

or update data extensions, the change control policy takes precedence over their permissions. If all users permissions for the account

are set to deny for deleting data extension and deny for updating a data extension, the change control policy doesn’t need to be

configured. Contact your account administrator if you would like to activate this feature.

Manage Policies for an Email Studio Data Extension

If you have this feature enabled in Email Studio, the admin user for your account can allow or disallow users to delete a data extension,

modify existing fields in a data extension, or add more fields to a data extension. Even if a user’s permission allows them to delete or

update data extensions, the change control policy takes precedence over their permissions. If all users permissions for the account are

set to deny for deleting data extension and deny for updating a data extension, the change control policy doesn’t need to be configured.

Contact your account administrator if you would like to activate this feature.

The change control policy provides more change control for specific data extension. By default, the change control policy is set to allow

users to delete, modify, and add more fields as long as their user permissions allows them to make those actions. When Allow users to

delete this Data Extension is unchecked, users with data extension delete permission set to allow can’t delete the data extension. When

Allow users to modify existing fields in this Data Extension is unchecked, users with data extension update permission set to allow can’t

modify the data extension. When Allow users to add more fields to this Data is unchecked, users with data extension update permission

set to allow can’t modify the data extension.

Delete Data Extension Permissions: Fields Permissions:

•

By checking Allow users to delete this Data Extension, users with delete permission can delete this data extension.

•

By unchecking this box, no users are able to delete this data extension.

•

By checking Allow users to modify existing fields in this Data Extension, users with update permissions can modify existing fields in

this data extension. By unchecking this box, no users can modify existing fields in this data extension.

•

By checking Allow users to add additional fields to this Data Extension, users with update permissions can add existing fields in this

data extension. By unchecking this box, no users can add existing fields in this data extension.

If you have this feature enabled, the admin user for your account can enable or change the data retention policy for new data extensions.

Contact your account administrator if you would like to activate the data retention policy feature. By default, the data extension retention

policy deletes unused data extensions after 6 months. The deletion process runs most nights. If the process doesn’t complete in one

run, the deletion will start where it left off on the next run. Retention settings must be enabled when creating a data extension. You can

modify the data retention policy for existing data extension where retention settings were enabled at creation.

Data Retention Options:

•

Retention Setting - Select On to ensure that the application deletes all records in the data extension at the same time.

–

Delete:

•

Individual Records - When this option is selected, the data extension is retained but the individual records inside the data

extension are deleted.

•

All Records - When this option is selected, the data extension is retained but the records inside the data extension are deleted.

•

All Records and Data Extension - When this option is selected, the entire data extension and the records inside the data

extension are deleted.

–

Period:

•

After - Enter the number of days after the data extension was created to wait before deleting.

•

Reset period on import - Check this box to extend the retention date following a new import to the data extension.

•

On - Select a specific date to delete.

124

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

This table shows how data retention settings for existing data extensions map to the new data retention policy settings when an account

opts into enhanced subscriber features:

Field after opting into enhanced subscriber featuresField before opting into enhanced subscriber feature

Retention SettingsUse Data Retention

Existing data extensions that have this field checked with one of

the following selected: All Records and Data Extension.

Existing data extensions that don’t have this field checked has the

following selected: Individual Records.

Use Object Based Retention

Existing data extensions that have this field checked and Use Object

Based Retention checked have the following selected: All Records

and Data Extensions.

Existing data extensions that don’t have this field checked and Use

Object Based Retention checked have the following selected: All

Records.

Delete Only Data At End Of Retention Period

After and the number enteredRetention Period

On and the selected fixed dateUse Fixed Date

Reset period on importReset Retention Period On Import

Retention Policy Support with Triggered Sends

If you use a TriggeredSendDataExtension in Email Studio with a triggered send, the data extension supports automatic data retention

policies. When defining a triggered send with a data extension source, you specify how long to retain the data.

Retention Policy Support with Triggered Sends

If you use a TriggeredSendDataExtension in Email Studio with a triggered send, the data extension supports automatic data retention

policies. When defining a triggered send with a data extension source, you specify how long to retain the data.

The default is 6 months. You may select a retention period ranging from one day to forever. The system deletes the data at the end of

the retention period. Subscriber data is not removed by the data retention policy; only the data extension data is removed.

You may delete data from the data extension, and import the data back in using AMPscript

Create a Data Extension from an Existing Data Extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a data extension from an existing data extension in Email Studio. Creating a data extension from an existing data extension allows

you to copy the fields and their configurations but doesn’t copy the data stored in the data extension itself.

1. Click Subscribers > Data Extensions > Create > Standard Data Extension > Create from Existing.

2. Select the existing data extension.

3. Complete the information in the Properties section.

4. Click Next.

5. Complete the information in the Fields section for each field you want to add.

6. Click Create.

125

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a Data Extension from a Template

Create a data extension with a data extension template. A few data extension templates are provided with Email Studio to enable specific

use cases, such as data extensions used in coupon-based solutions.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Data Extensions.

3. Click Create, and then choose a data extension type.

•

Standard Data Extension: Use a standard data extension to create custom fields to store data.

•

Filtered Data Extension: A filtered data extension is generated by filtering fields, measures, and filters for sendable data extensions

from a source data extension.

•

Random Data Extension: Use a random data extension to randomly select subscribers from a source data extension.

4. Click Standard Data Extension.

5. Complete the information in the Properties section.

DescriptionOption

Click Create from Template, select a data extension template, and click Continue.Creation Method

Name of the data extension. Use this name to identify the data extension in Email Studio.Name

A unique value that identifies the data extension. Use this value to identify the data extension

with an API call.

External Key

Description of data extension. Use this description to further help identify the data extension

within Email Studio.

Description

Select Change Location to store the data extension in a different folder location.Location

Indicates whether you can send messages to subscribers whose information is in the data

extension.

Used for Sending

Indicates whether you can send test messages to the contacts in the data extension. To select

this option, you must also select Used for Sending.

Used for Testing

To associate a data extension used for sending with a Campaign, select the radio button for

the appropriate Campaign.

Campaign

6. Complete the information in the Fields section for each field you want to add in addition to the fields that are required for the

template. To create a new field in the data extension, click Add.

•

Name: The name of the column

•

Data Type: The data type of the contents of the field. Valid values include:

–

Text: A combination of letters, numbers, and spaces.

–

Number: An integer. Decimal values aren’t supported.

–

Date: A system date. You can use an AMPscript function to format this value when you present it in a message.

–

Boolean: A 0 or 1 value.

–

Email Address: An email address. A field of this type must exist in order for you to send an email to a data extension. The

system doesn’t verify that the value in this field is a valid email address when importing data.

–

Phone: A phone number.

–

Decimal: A number with a decimal point.

126

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

–

Length: Maximum number of characters, including spaces, you can import into this column. If you select the Decimal data

type, you specify both the total maximum number of characters and how many of the total appear after the decimal point.

Enter the maximum number of digits allowed in the field in the Precision box, and enter the quantity of numbers

located to the right of the decimal point in the Scale box. For example, a price field with the value 5 in the Precision box

and the value 2 in the Scale box can display a price like 123.45.

–

Primary Key: Determines whether the system considers the field to be the primary key of the table. If you select this checkbox,

the system requires that the value in this field is unique so it can use this field to uniquely identify a row. If you select this

checkbox for more than one column, then the combination of the values in the columns must be unique. If you don’t select

this checkbox, the system doesn’t require the value in this field to be unique.

–

Nullable: Determines whether this column can be empty. If you select this checkbox, you can import a NULL, empty, value

for this column. If you don’t select this checkbox and try to import a NULL value for this column, the system responds as you

specify in the Skip Rows with Bad Data field on the import definition.

7. Save your changes.

Create a Filtered Data Extension

Create a filtered data extension in Email Studio. A filtered data extension is generated by filtering fields, filters, and measures. Filtered

data extension takes on the same characteristics as the source data extension. To update a filtered data extension to sendable or

non-sendable, change the source data extension to sendable or non-sendable. To remove data from a filtered data extension, remove

the data from the source data extension and then refresh the filtered data extension.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Data Extensions > Create > Filtered Data Extension > OK.

3. Select a standard data extension to filter as the source data extension. If the selected data extension has data retention enabled, you

must have the Manage Data Retention permission.

4. Click OK.

5. Drag Fields, Filters, or Measure from the left column to the Create Filter canvas.

Note: Choose an operator that aligns with the type of field you chose. For example, don’t use the less than operator with a

text field. For date attributes, only the following operators are supported: is equal to, is not equal to, is greater than, and is less

than.

6. Select an AND or OR operator. To group your criteria, hover over the grouping operator so that it turns a darker blue, and click to

change the operator. If you choose AND, the record must meet all criteria to be included in the group. If you choose OR, the record

must meet one of the criteria, not necessarily all criteria, to be included in the group.

7. Click Save & Build.

8. Enter a name and description for the filtered data extension.

9. Select a folder in which to store the filtered data extension, or select New Folder to create a folder.

10. Save the data extension.

Filtered Data Extensions

Use a filtered data extension to target a more specific set of subscribers. You can filter a data extension by fields or measures or apply

existing data filters.

127

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Filtered Data Extensions

Use a filtered data extension to target a more specific set of subscribers. You can filter a data extension by fields or measures or apply

existing data filters.

You can create a filtered data extension from a saved or existing data filter. To use a data filter as a starting point, copy it and edit it.

However, you can’t apply a data filter created from a filter data extension when dragging and dropping segments.

Refresh a Filtered Data Extension

Newly added or modified records are not automatically added to filtered data extensions. To add new records to a data extension, refresh

the filtered data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

You can also refresh a data extension by clicking the name of the data extension and then click refresh.

1. Select the checkbox next to the filtered data extension to refresh.

2. Click Refresh under Actions.

3. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box that appears.

The application scans all records data and rebuilds the filtered data extension.

Create a Data Extension That Contains Randomly Selected Subscribers

A random data extension splits up subscribers from a selected standard data extension and places the subscribers into new data extensions

in Email Studio. You can create as many as 12 data extensions at a time.

1. In Email Studio, on the Subscribers tab, click Data Extensions.

2. Click Create.

3. Select Random Data Extension.

4. Click OK.

5. Select a source data extension of records to split.

6. Click OK.

7. Click Add Data Extension.

a. Enter a name for the data extension.

b. In the Data Extension Size field, enter either a percentage or a number that represents how many of the records in the selected

data extension are randomly added to this data extension.

c. To change the location the data extension is saved, click Change Location and select a folder in which to store the data extension.

8. Repeat the Add Data Extension step to create more splits. You can create up to 12 splits.

9. If you want to create a data extension from the remaining subscribers, click Add Remainder.

10. Click Save & Build.

Data Extension Properties for Marketing Cloud Engagement

View statistics about the data extension and change properties of the data extension in the data extension details section of Email Studio.

To access data extension properties, select the data extension name.

128

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

OptionsDescriptionField

To change the name or the description,

make your modifications to the text box at

The name displays in the data extension

workspace and in the Send wizard.

Name and Description

the top of the Properties tab. When you click

Done, your change takes effect.

To create a campaign, click Create

Campaign.

Click the plus sign to associate a data

extension used for sending with a

Campaign. Select the radio button for the

appropriate Campaign, optional.

Campaign

To change the external key, make your

modifications to the text box and click

Done.

The external key is a unique identifier. This

value is used by developers in their API calls

to access the data extension

programmatically.

External Key

These dates are recorded.Date on which this data extension was

created and the date when it was last

modified.

Created and Last Modified

To relocate, click the Change button, which

opens Select Location showing the folder

Folder in which this data extension is

located.

Location

structure. Click the desired folder and click

OK.

This is set by the application.There are 3 types of data extension:

standard, filtered, or random.

Type

Click the checkbox to use this data extension

as part of sends. Select a data extension field

Indicates whether you intend for this data

extension to have messages sent to it. This

Used For Sending

in the first box and a field on the subscriberscheckbox determines whether the data

table field in the second box. For example,extension is available to use as part of sends.

EmailAddress relates to Subscribers onRelates to subscribers on - If you select the

SubscriberKey. Only Text, Email Address,Used for Sending checkbox, this field

or Phone can be related to the subscriber

key.

determines the field in the data extension

that relates to the Subscriber table.

Click the checkbox to use this data extension

as part of test sends.

If you select the Used for Sending checkbox,

this field indicates whether you intend this

data extension to have test messages sent

to it.

Used For Testing

Click the Records tab to review record data

and to import records. The Tracking tab

Number of records who currently belong to

this data extension.

Size

shows Data Extension composition, provides

access to reports, and recent sends.

Click Edit Fields to add, remove, or modify

fields.

The fields that have been added to the data

extension to contain your external data.

Fields

129

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Set Enterprise 2.0 Shared Data Extension Permissions

Data Extension Permissions is a Marketing Cloud Engagement tool that controls business unit access to shared data extensions in Email

Studio. By checking the box next to a permission, you can enable or disable that permission.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click Shared Data Extension.

3. Select the data extension name.

4. Click Permissions.

5. Select the checkbox next to the names of the business unit to set or change permissions for. When multiple business units are

selected, existing permissions do not display. To review a specific business unit's permissions, only select the checkbox next that

business unit.

6. Click Edit.

7. Set to allow or deny actions the business unit can take on the data extension.

8. Optionally, set a Start Sharing and End Sharing date.

9. Click Save.

Import into a Data Extension

Import subscriber data into a data extension in Email Studio.

Your account must be configured to use enhanced FTP to use the Data Extension import wizard. Before you can import a file, you must

create a data extension and create the import file. Your import file must contain a header row and at least one row of data. Your import

file must be a comma-delimiter, tab-delimiter, or other delimited file. The file size can’t exceed 20 MB when using the import wizard.

For files 20 MB or larger use an Automation Studio import activity. You can use an import activity or the import wizard to populate your

data extension.

After you have imported into a data extension, you can include the data in your messages with AMPscript functions. For example, you

could summarize the customer's transactions for the month in an email.

You can view the data in a data extension, and a count of the records. From the data extension workspace, select the name of the data

extension and click the Records tab.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Data Extensions.

3. Under Actions click Import for the data extension to import into.

4. Complete the Import Into Data Extension dialog box:

•

File Location and File:

–

My computer—If the file you want to import is on your hard drive, click the Browse button and locate the imported file on

your computer. If the file size exceeds 20 MB, you must use the FTP option. The file name must be 99 characters or less.

–

FTP—To use a file that you've uploaded to the enhanced FTP site, type the filename in the File name field. File names are

case-sensitive. See the Enhanced FTP Guide for details on using the FTP option.

•

Compressed—Determines whether the system uncompresses the file when the activity runs. If you select this checkbox, the

value you enter in the File Naming field must have a .zip extension.

•

Encrypted—Determines whether the system decrypts the file when the activity runs. If you select this checkbox and don’t select

the File is compressed checkbox, then the value that you enter in the File Naming field must have a .pgp or .gpg extension.

•

Delimiter:

130

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Comma—If you choose this file type, the value that you enter in the File Naming field must have a .csv extension.

–

Tab—If you choose this file type, the value that you enter in the File Naming field must have a .txt extension.

–

Other—If you choose this file type, you must enter a 1-character delimiter in the Other Delimiter field.

•

Data Format—You can select a date format from the dropdown menu in this section to use as part of the import. Choose the

date format that most closely matches the region from which you’re conducting the import.

•

Import Type:

–

Add and update—If the import file contains records with a primary key or email address that doesn’t exist in the data

extension, the import creates a record for that information. If the import file contains records with a primary key (or email

address) that does exist in the data extension, the import updates the record to match what is in the import file.

–

Add only—The import creates records for primary keys that don’t exist in the data extension and ignores records whose

primary keys exist.

–

Update Only—If the import file contains records with a primary key or email address that does exist in the data extension,

the import updates the record to match what is in the import file.

–

Overwrite—The import overwrites all records.

Note: When a Primary Key field is configured with a default value, the default value isn’t applied during imports.

•

Import Options:

–

Skip rows with bad data.

–

Respect double quotes as a text qualifier—If you select the checkbox, the system treats double quotes as a text delimiter.

If you don’t select this checkbox, the system ignores double quotes in your import file.

•

File Encoding—Select the type of file encoding you want to use. If no type is selected, the system defaults to UTF-8.

5. Click Next.

6. Complete the Configure Mapping dialog box that appears.

•

Map by Header Row—The import updates the columns in the data extension with the information in the import file by matching

the column headings.

•

Map by Ordinal—The import updates the first column in the data extension with the first column in the import file, the second

column with the second column, and so on. When Import File has column headers is checked, the header value in the import

file is displayed in italics.

•

Map Manually—The import file columns that directly match a data extension column are mapped automatically. To manually

map an import file column, select the column name in the dropdown next to the data extension column. An import file column

can only be mapped to 1 data extension column.

7. Click Next.

8. Review the Review & Import dialog box that appears.

9. Enter an email address to receive an email when the import completes. You receive a list of errors. By default your Notification Email

Address is populated.

10. Click Import.

SEE ALSO:

Add Marketing Cloud SFTP Accounts

File Locations

131

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

View Data Extension Records

View data extension records in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click Data Extension.

3. Select the data extension name.

4. Click Records.

From here you can review records, export records, import records, and clear data.

Export a Data Extension

Export subscribers from Email studio to a Marketing Cloud Engagement data extension.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click Data Extensions.

3. Under actions click Export for the data extension to export.

4. Complete the dialog box:

•

Data Extension - The name of the data extension selected to export. If file size exceeds 20MB, you must use the FTP option.

•

Filename - Enter a name for the export filename.

•

File type - Supported export file types:

–

Comma-separated values - If you choose this file type, the export file exports as a CSV file.

–

Tab-separated values - If you choose this file type, the export file exports as a TXT file.

–

Other - If you choose this file type, you must enter a 1-character delimiter.

•

Export options - Optional export options:

–

Include column headers - Export the data extension field names as column headers.

–

Compress file - The system compresses the file when the export runs. The filename exports with a .ZIP extension.

–

Encrypt file - The system encrypt the file when the export runs. Only available when using the FTP delivery option. If you

select this checkbox, you must select PGP or GPG and a Key.

•

Delivery location -

–

Browser download - To export to your computer. If file size exceeds 20MB, you must use the FTP option.

–

FTP - To export to your enhanced FTP location. Enter an email address to receive an email when the export completes. You

will also receive a list of errors. By default your Notification Email Address is populated.

•

File Encoding - Select the type of file encoding you want to use. If no type is selected, the system defaults to UTF-8.

5. Click Export.

Send to Subscribers in a Data Extension

You can use Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement to send a message to subscribers in a data extension.

If you use the Subscriber Key to identify your subscribers, the application deduplicates your data extension list based on the Subscriber

Key value instead of the email address.

If you can send to a data extension, you can also use the send preview feature with the data extension. The send preview lets you see

what the personalization and dynamic content looks like for an individual message recipient.

132

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

When you send an email to a data extension, the system uses the List Detective tool to scan the email addresses in the data extension.

The List Detective protects your deliverability by preventing the sending of email to problematic addresses. The email addresses identified

by the List Detective aren’t sent to, so the sends don’t appear in your tracking. The email addresses in the data extension aren’t removed

or changed by List Detective.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click Data Extensions.

3. Under Actions click Send. The send option only displays for sendable data extension. To determine if a data extension is sendable,

check the Sendable column on the data extension grid or check the Used For Sending field on the data extension properties.

4. Click Next.

5. Select the email to send.

6. Click Next.

7. Choose Recipients Dialog Box - the lists previously selected will already be checked. Optional, you can add or remove groups and

lists in this step.

•

Select the target recipients you wish to send the email to. Can you send to lists or group, or data extensions with an associated

publication list, or an Audience with an associated publication list, or a Data Filter with an associated publication list. Depending

on the features enabled you may see different options. We recommend sending to a maximum of 50 lists. If you exceed that

number you may have trouble viewing tracking for that send. When sending to data extensions or an audience check,

De-duplicate subscribers by email address you don’t want subscribers to receive multiple emails.

8. Click Next.

9. Choose Excludes and Suppressions Dialog Box This box allows you to refine your recipients and is an optional step depending on

your business needs. This option is only used when some subscribers are selected as recipients but you don’t want to send to them.

Any recipient that is listed as a target audience and listed on an exclude or suppression list won’t get the email. Select the subscribers

to exclude or suppression from this send.

•

This box allows you to refine your recipients and is an optional step depending on your business needs. This option is only used

when some subscribers are selected as recipients but you don’t want to send to them. Any recipient that is listed as a target

audience and listed on an exclude or suppression list won’t get the email.

•

Select the subscribers to exclude or suppression from this send.

10. Click Next.

11. Send Options Dialog Box

•

Subject - Select the Insert Dynamic Content icon next to the subject line to send a dynamic subject email. Select the Insert

Personalization icon to add personalization to the subject line.

•

Preheader - Preheader is text displayed after the subject line when an email is previewed. The preheader can be modified in

email properties.

•

From Options:

–

If to choose a specific email address from which you want to send the email message, click the top radio button next to Use

the following from name and address. Select the from name and address in the dropdown menu.

–

If to use a send classification, click the radio button next to Select a send classification and select the send classification from

the dropdown menu.

–

Override sender profile with: - Determines whether the interaction uses a different sender profile than what is specified

on the send classification. If you select this checkbox, you must select a sender profile to use.

133

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

–

Override delivery profile with: - Determines whether the interaction uses a different delivery profile than what is specified

on the send classification. If you select this checkbox, you must select a delivery profile to use. If these options aren’t available

in your account contact your account executive to have it enabled.

•

Send Options:

–

Allows you to select Send as Multipart MIME. The system sends both the HTML and Text version of the email, including

the text version you’ve created, and whichever version is accepted by the subscriber's email client is delivered. If Multipart

MIME isn’t enabled in your account contact your account executive to have it enabled.

–

Allows you to select Track all links found within this email. If you select this checkbox, the system collects tracking on

the links.

–

Allows you to select to Suppress this send from reports. If you select this checkbox, the email is sent to the designated

list without the job appearing in reports. The job is automatically added to the Test Send Emails folder.

–

Allows you to select Enable send logging to a data extension. If Send Logging isn’t enabled in your account executive

to have it enabled.

–

Allows you to select the Tracking Destination folder. If you select a predefined folder, the job will automatically be placed

in that folder at the time of send.

•

Testing Options - If this feature is enabled in your account, the Email Send Wizard includes an option labeled Send All Emails

to. An email is generated for each subscriber and delivered to a single test address that you specify. The key benefit of this option

is that you’re able to see exactly how each email looks to each subscriber. If you used personalization strings or dynamic content

in the email, each email contains the data specific to the targeted subscriber. Emails that you send to a test list or via the Email

Send Wizard's test option are charged to your account in the same way as any emails that you send to your subscribers. Keep

in mind that the test email address receives as many email messages as there are subscribers on the list or group selected. If the

lists and groups you select contain many subscribers, using this feature may not be a feasible option contact your account

executive to have it enabled.

12. Click Next.

13. Schedule Send Dialog Box

•

Send Email - This box allows you to select whether to send your email Immediately or Later. If you choose Later, you can select

the date and time of the send.

•

Send Throttling - Send Throttling allows you to select a range of hours during which you want to send your email. A Start and

End time required. You can also specify how many emails you want to send per hour during that time.

The system sends emails during the hours you specify every day (starting the day you send the email) until all the emails are sent.

When using Send Throttling, you should not schedule the email in the upper half of the dialog box. Send throttling overrides

scheduling, but scheduling the email can corrupt the send throttle process. It's imperative that you either schedule the email to

send in the future or select the Send Throttle checkbox.

The system begins processing the email send job at the start time you specify. The send isn’t spread evenly between the start and

end times. The system continues sending during the specified time range until the send is complete or the end time you specified

is reached, whichever comes first. If the end time is reached before the send is complete, the system will continue the send the next

day at the same start time. This process continues until the send is complete.

You can use Send Throttling for the following reasons:

134

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

To control inbound traffic to a website, meaning, the interest generated by email may result in server crashes due to too many

people visiting.

•

To limit the number of emails sent to a particular domain each hour.

14. Click Next.

15. Confirm Send Dialog Box

This box allows you to review the summary of your email's information before sending. If there are validation errors, you see the

Validations errors dialog box.

16. After verifying all the information is correct, select the This information is correct check box and click Send.

View Tracking for Data Extensions

View tracking for data extensions in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click Data Extension.

3. Select the data extension name.

4. Click Tracking.

From here you can review sends for the last 30 days and access reporting.

Data Relationships

A data relationship in Email Studio specifies that a column in one data extension contains the same kind of information as a column in

another data extension or in a subscriber attribute. Use a data relationship to relate two data extensions based on a common column

contained in both data extensions. You can then apply a filter to the two data extensions and create a new segment of data.

Usually, the column is the primary key of one of the data extensions. For example, if you store an airport code as a subscriber attribute

and create a data extension that contains airport names related to the airport codes, you would create a data relationship to declare

that the airport code on the subscriber contains the same kind of information as the airport code in the data extension. This process

allows the relationship to find the airport name by looking up the row in the data extension that contains the same airport code as the

subscriber attribute.

You can relate multiple columns from each table to use multiple values to identify the correct row in the related table.

Before you create a data relationship, you must create the data extensions that are involved in the relationship. After you create a data

relationship, you can include information from the data extension in messages to subscribers via a data filter.

135

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a Data Relationship in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a data relationship between data extensions in Email Studio.

Troubleshoot Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Relationships

Review this information to troubleshoot your data relationships for data extensions in Email Studio.

Create a Data Relationship in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a data relationship between data extensions in Email Studio.

Before you start this procedure, you must create the data extensions that are involved in the relationship. After you complete this

procedure and populate the data extensions with data, you can include information from a data extension in a message to subscribers.

1. Click Subscribers > Data Relationships > Create.

2. In the Properties section, provide a name, description, and external key for the data relationship. The external key identifies the data

relationship in API calls.

3. In the Fields section, use the <select object> list boxes to identify the data extensions involved in the data relationship, and use the

<select field> list boxes to identify the data extension fields involved in the relationship.

4. If more than one column in each data extension is involved, click Add to display another set of <select field> list boxes.

5. Save your changes.

SEE ALSO:

Subscriber Key in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Data Relationships

Troubleshoot Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Relationships

Review this information to troubleshoot your data relationships for data extensions in Email Studio.

The External Key Cannot Exceed 36 Characters.

The external key cannot be longer than 36 characters.

This error occurs when you try to save the data relationship and the length of the value in the External Key field exceeds 36 characters.

Correct the error by reducing the number of characters in the external key value to 36 or fewer.

External Key Already Exists

An object with external key <external key> already exists.

This error occurs when you try to save the data relationship and the value in the External Key field for the data extension is the same as

the external key for a data relationship that already exists. Correct this error by changing the name and external key values.

Relationship Already Exists

A relationship already exists for the left and right side of the relationship.

This error occur when you try to save a data relationship where the combination of the left and right side objects already appears in

another data relationship. Solve this error with one of these actions:

•

Change the left-side object.

•

Change the right-side object.

•

Remove the data relationship.

136

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Data Relationship Name Cannot Exceed 64 Characters

The relationship name cannot be longer than 64 characters.

This error occurs when you try to save the data relationship and the length of the value in the Name field is greater than 64 characters,

including spaces. Correct this error by reducing the number of characters in the Name value to 64 or fewer.

Data Relationship Name Cannot Be Blank

The relationship name cannot be blank.

This error occurs when you try to save the data relationship without a value in the Name field. Correct this error by entering a name for

the data relationship.

Relationship Must Have Both Left and Right Columns

There must be a left and right field when defining a relationship.

This error occurs when you try to save the data relationship with a right or left column. Correct this error by including both columns in

your data relationship.

Same Column Cannot Exist on Both Sides of a Relationship

The same field cannot be selected when mapping data relationship fields.

This error occurs when you try to save the data relationship with both the left and right column using the same column in the same

object. Correct this error by selecting a different column for either the left or right side of the relationship.

Data Extension Error Messages

Use this information to resolve errors involving data extensions in Email Studio.

DescriptionError

Specify a name

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the Name field for the data extension is NULL. Correct this error by

entering a value in the Name field for the data extension.

Specify a Name

An object named <object name> already

exists.

This error occurs when you try to save a data extension (new or

modified) with a value in the Name field that matches the name

Object Name Already Exists

of a data extension that already exists. Correct this error by using

a different data extension name.

An object with external key <external key>

already exists.

This error occurs when try to save the data extension when the

value in the External Key field for the data extension is the same

External Key Already Exists

as the External Key for a data extension that already exists. Correct

this error by using a different external key value.

137

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionError

Field name cannot be blank.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the Name field for one of the columns is NULL. Correct this error

Field Name Cannot Be Blank

by entering a name for the field or deleting the column from the

data extension.

A field named <column name> already exists

on object <object name>.

This error occurs when you create a column in a data extension

with the same name as a column that already exists. Correct this

error by changing the field name.

Field Name Already Exists

A text field with no length specified

cannot be used as primary key.

This error occurs when you select the Primary Key checkbox for

a column whose Data type is Text and whose Length field is NULL.

Correct this error by taking one of these steps:

Text Field with No Length Cannot Be Primary Key

•

Specify a maximum length for the Data Type field in the primary

key.

•

Clear the Primary Key checkbox for the text field.

•

Change the Data type of the text field to a different value.

A primary key field cannot be nullable.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

both the Primary Key checkbox and the Nullable checkbox are

Primary Key Cannot Be Nullable

selected for a column. Correct this error by taking one of these

actions:

•

Clear the Primary Key checkbox for the column.

•

Clear the Nullable checkbox for the column.

•

Clear both the Primary Key checkbox and the Nullable

checkbox for the column.

Cannot contain illegal characters:

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension and the

name contains one of these characters:

Cannot Contain Illegal Characters

•

138

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionError

•

(

•

)

•

{

•

}

•

[

•

]

•

Correct this error by removing the illegal character.

The external key cannot be longer than 36

characters.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension and the

length of the value in the External Key field is greater than 36

External Key Cannot Exceed 36 Characters

characters. Correct this error by reducing the number of characters

in the External Key value to 36 or fewer.

The data extension name cannot be longer

than 128 characters.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the length of the value in the Name field is greater than 128

Data Extension Name Cannot Exceed 128 Characters

characters. Correct this error by reducing the number of characters

in the Name field to 128 or fewer.

The data extension name cannot be blank.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the Name field is NULL. Correct this error by entering a name value

in the Name field.

Data Extension Name Cannot Be Blank

The data extension name cannot begin with

an underscore.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the first character in the value in the Name field is _. Correct this

Data Extension Name Cannot Begin with an Underscore

error by entering a number or letter as the first character in the

name.

139

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionError

The data extension name cannot consist

entirely of numbers.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the value in the Name field includes only numbers. Correct this

error by entering a letter in the value.

Data Extension Name Cannot Consist Entirely of Numbers

Field name cannot be blank.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the Name field for the column is NULL. Correct this error by entering

a value in the Name field for the column.

Field Name Cannot Be Blank

Field name cannot begin with an underscore.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the first character in the value for the field name is _. Correct this

Field Name Cannot Begin with Underscore

error by entering a number or letter as the first character in the

name.

Field name cannot consist entirely of

numbers.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the value in the Name field includes only numbers. Correct this

error by entering a letter in the value.

Field Name Cannot Consist Entirely of Numbers

Field name cannot be longer than 128

characters.

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the length of the field name value is greater than 128 characters.

Field Name Cannot Be Longer Than 128 Characters

Correct this error by reducing the number of characters in the

Name field to 128 or fewer.

The length of an existing Text field cannot

be decreased.

This error occurs when you try to modify a previously saved data

extension by reducing the character length of a text-type field. This

Length of an Existing Text Field Cannot Be Decreased

change could result in the loss of data. Correct this error by entering

a character length for the field that is the same or greater than it

was at the time the data extension was previously saved.

This error occurs when you try to import into a data extension and

your default file location is modified.

The default settings are:

File Location Cannot be Blank

•

Name: ExactTarget Enhanced FTP Import

•

External Key: ExactTarget Enhanced FTP Import

•

Description: Enhanced FTP Import Directory

140

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionError

•

Location Type: Enhanced FTP Site Import Directory

This error occurs when you try to save the data extension when

the Name field for the data extension has a space before or after

Error Updating Filter

the first or last letter in the field. Correct this error by removing

extra spaces from the Name field.

This error can occur when you attempt to rename or delete a data

extension. Correct the error by enabling the Allow users to delete

this Data Extension option in Manage Data Extension Policies.

The deletion of the Object is not currently allowed, therefore the

Object cannot be renamed

Data Extensions Data Types in Email Studio

You can select a data type from these choices when you create a column in an Email Studio data extension.

NotesAccepted InputData Type

A combination of letters, numbers, and

spaces, up to 4,000 characters

Text

•

You can increase the length of a text

field, but you can’t decrease it.

An integer, between -2,147,483,648 and

2,147,483,648

Number

•

You can’t import decimal values into a

column with the Number data type. To

import a decimal value, use the Decimal

data type.

A system date, from 01/01/1753 to

12/31/9999

Date

•

Various formats are accepted, such as

1/1/2005 or January 1, 2005.

•

Use an AMPscript function to format.

•

All dates are stored as MM/DD/YYYY,

and dates entered in a different format

are updated when stored.

•

Date values generated by Marketing

Cloud use Central Standard Time unless

documented otherwise.

•

You can add an HH:MM time value after

the date value, such as 12/12/2012

12:12 PM.

—

True values—1, Y, Yes, true

Boolean

False values—0, N, No, false

An email addressEmail

•

This field is required to send an email to

a data extension.

•

The username part can be up to 100

characters long. In total, the email

141

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

NotesAccepted InputData Type

address, including the domain name,

can be up to 254 characters long.

•

During an import or API insertion, the

email address syntax is checked but not

whether the email address is valid. If the

syntax is incorrect, an error is shown.

A phone numberPhone

•

The Phone data type accepts 15-digit

strings. During an import or API

insertion, non-digit characters are

removed. These examples are

acceptable:

–

555-555-5555

–

1-555-555-5555

–

1-(555)-555-5555

–

(555)-555-5555

–

11555555555

–

111555555555

A number with a decimal pointDecimal

•

When you define a decimal field, the

total number of digits is called precision,

and the number of digits after the

decimal point is called scale. The first

field is precision, and the second field

is scale.

The precision can’t exceed 29 digits, and

the scale can’t exceed 8 digits. For

example, you define a decimal field with

a length of 8.2. The maximum number

of digits the field can hold is 8, with 2

digits after the decimal point and up to

6 digits before the decimal. If your

import doesn’t declare the scale, the

decimals are always filled with 0s, in this

example 2 digits.

•

Examples of acceptable numbers for a

length of 8.2 include:

–

123456.78 (imported as 123456.78)

–

123456 (imported as 123456.00)

–

12.34 (imported as 12.34)

–

1234 (imported as 1234.00)

–

0.12 (imported as 0.12)

142

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

NotesAccepted InputData Type

–

12 (imported as 12.00)

An ISO language and country codeLocale

•

Requires a minimum of two characters

to define the country of the subscriber

with a maximum of five characters to

accommodate a language. For example,

a resident of the United States who

speaks English receives the EN-US

Locale value.

Operators

Review this list of operators for use with profile and preference attributes in data extensions for Email Studio.

Use these options with profile attributes:

DescriptionFunction

Subscribers with an attribute definition that exactly matches the

value are included in the group. Choose only one value.

is equal to

Subscribers with an attribute definition that doesn’t match the

value are included in the group. Choose only one value.

is not equal to

Use this operator when the attribute is a numeric value. Subscribers

with an attribute definition greater than or less than or equal to

the value are included in the group.

•

is greater than

•

greater than

•

equal to

Use this operator when the attribute is a numeric value. Subscribers

with an attribute definition less than (or less than or equal to) the

value are included in the group.

•

is less than

•

less than

•

equal to

The application looks for attribute values that begin with the exact

sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison value.

begins with

Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters. Search

strings aren’t case-sensitive.

The application looks for attribute values that include or exclude

the exact sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison

•

contains

•

does not contain

value. Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters.

Search strings aren’t case-sensitive.

The application looks for attribute values that end with the exact

sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison value.

ends with

Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters. Search

strings aren’t case-sensitive.

143

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Subscribers with an attribute definition that matches one of the

values you define in a comma-delimited string of values are

exists in

included in the group. The exists in operator looks for a partial

match of the entire value. For example, if your match criteria is

north, the exists in operator returns subscribers with north,

northwest, and northeast attribute values, but not subscribers with

south, southwest, and southeast attribute values.

The exists in whole word operator looks for a full match of the

entire value. For example, if your match criteria is 2326,5308,

exists in whole word

this operator returns only subscribers with 2326 or 5308

attribute values.

Subscribers with an attribute definition that don’t match any of

the values you define in a comma-delimited string of values are

does not exist in

included in the group. This operator isn’t applicable when choosing

an attribute with restricted values, as you can select only one of

the restricted values as the comparison value. Search strings aren’t

case-sensitive.

To filter for a blank value select is empty or isn’t empty.

•

is empty

•

is not empty

Use this option for preference attributes:

DescriptionFunction

The application looks for of either a true or false value. Your only

options are True and False.

Data Filters with Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

A data filter is a group of criteria that segments a subscriber list or data extension. You can segment a subscriber list or data extension

using data filters and use the segments during an automation. Data Filters can be used with accounts that have enhanced subscriber

features turned on in Email Studio.

Refer to Data Filter if your account doesn’t have enhanced subscribers features enabled.

A data filter is a group of criteria that segments a subscriber list or data extension. Use a data filter to apply complex segmentation rules

to your subscriber lists or data extensions. Complex segmentation makes it easier for you to precisely target your message to the specific

subscriber.

The item in the list being filtered must satisfy the criteria to be included in the segment.

Example: You could use a data filter to get all the subscribers on a list who own a car OR a motorcycle AND live in the state of

Indiana OR Ohio. Using the data filter feature requires the understanding of AND and OR logical operators.

When you create a standalone filter definition and don’t associate it with a subscriber list or data extension, you can reuse the same filter

definition with many lists or data extension. You can create different groups or different filter activities that use the same data filter. You

can select only one list or data extension per group or Automation Studio filter activity.

144

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Filter from Profile Attributes

Follow these steps to create a data filter from profile attributes for subscribers in Email Studio.

Create a Data Filter from a Data Extension

Follow these steps to create a data filter from a data extension in Email Studio.

Modify an Existing Data Filter

Follow these steps to modify an existing data filter in Email Studio.

Copy a Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Filter

Follow these steps to copy an existing data filter in Email Studio. This process creates a new data filter when copying a data extension.

Save a Data Extension Filter

You can create and save a data filter based on the filter settings of a data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can include

more filtered data extensions using the filter as a starting point in Email Studio.

Delete Data Filters in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Follow these steps to delete one or more data filters in Email Studio.

Data Filter Scenario in Marketing Cloud Engagement

You can use the data filter feature in Email Studio to segment a subscriber list with the filter activity.

Enhanced Subscriber Feature Data Filter Operators

You can set profile and preference attributes for data filters using the enhanced subscriber feature in Email Studio.

145

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Data Filter Definition for Marketing Cloud Engagement

You can create a data filter definition on the Subscribers tab in Email Studio. Choose whether to create a filter that segments a

subscriber list or a data extension.

Filter Activity in Marketing Cloud Engagement

If you use interactions in Email Studio, you can use data filters to segment subscriber lists or data extensions. Select the data filter

when you create a filter activity.

Data Filters in a Marketing Cloud Engagement Group

You can use data filters to segment subscriber lists by selecting the data filter when you create a group, regardless of whether you

use interactions in Email Studio.

SEE ALSO:

Data Filters without Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Filter from Profile Attributes

Follow these steps to create a data filter from profile attributes for subscribers in Email Studio.

Create the data filters that include the data filter definition.

1. Choose Subscribers > Data Filters.

2. Click Create.

3. Choose Profile Attribute to create a filter based on profiles attributes or preferences attributes from a list. Choose Data Extension

to filter records from a data extension.

4. Click OK.

5. Drag Profile & Preference Attributes, Filters, Measure, or saved Filters to the Create Filter canvas.

For date fields, select Account Time Zone to use the time zone for the account. Leave Account Time Zone unchecked to use Central

Standard Time.

6. Choose an AND or an OR operator and save. To group your criteria, hover over the grouping operator so that it turns a darker blue,

and then click to change the operator.

If you choose AND, the subscriber must meet all criteria to be included in the group.

If you choose OR, the subscriber must meet at least one of the criteria to be included in the group.

Note: Choose an operator that aligns with the type of attribute you chose. For example, don’t use the less than operator with

a text attribute. For date attributes, only the ‘is equal to,’ ‘is not equal to,’ ‘is greater than’ and ‘is less than’ operators are

supported.

7. Enter a name and description.

8. Choose a folder location and save.

Include the filter definition when you create a group filter or a filter activity.

Create a Data Filter from a Data Extension

Follow these steps to create a data filter from a data extension in Email Studio.

Create the measures that include the data filter definition.

1. Choose Subscribers > Data Filters.

146

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

2. Click Create.

3. To filter records from a data extension, choose Data Extension. To create a filter based on profiles attributes from a list, choose

Profile Attribute.

4. Click OK.

5. Choose a source data extension to filter.

6. Click OK.

7. Drag Fields, Measure, or saved filters to the Create Filter canvas.

Note: For date fields, choose Account Time Zone to use the time zone for the account. Leave Account Time Zone unchecked

to use Central Standard Time. Up to 10 characters are allowed for the Decimal Data type when creating a Data Filters from a

Data Extension.

8. Choose an AND or an OR operator and save. You can group your criteria by hovering over the grouping operator so that it turns a

darker blue, then click to change the operator.

•

If you choose AND, the subscriber must meet all criteria to be included in the filter.

•

If you choose OR, the subscriber must meet at least one of the criteria to be included in the filter.

Note: Choose an operator that makes sense with the type of attribute you chose. For example, don’t use the less than operator

with a text attribute. For date attributes, only the ‘is equal to,’ ‘is not equal to,’ ‘is greater than’ and ‘is less than’ operators are

supported.

9. Enter a name and description.

10. Select a folder location and save.

Include the filter definition when you create a group filter or a filter activity.

Modify an Existing Data Filter

Follow these steps to modify an existing data filter in Email Studio.

1. Click Subscribers > Data Filter.

2. Choose the data filter.

3. Review and update the data filter’s properties, then click Save.

Copy a Marketing Cloud Engagement Data Filter

Follow these steps to copy an existing data filter in Email Studio. This process creates a new data filter when copying a data extension.

1. Click Subscribers > Data Filter.

2. Select the data filter to copy.

3. Choose Copy and the folder location.

4. Enter a Name, Description, and External Key.

5. Click Copy.

Save a Data Extension Filter

You can create and save a data filter based on the filter settings of a data extension in Marketing Cloud Engagement. You can include

more filtered data extensions using the filter as a starting point in Email Studio.

147

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create the filter.

1. Click Subscribers > Data Extension.

2. Choose the data extension and click Properties.

3. Click Save As Filter.

4. Enter a Name, Description, and External Key.

5. Select a folder location and save the filter.

You can either click Open New Filter or Close.

Delete Data Filters in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Follow these steps to delete one or more data filters in Email Studio.

1. Click Subscribers > Data Filters.

2. Select the data filters to delete.

3. Click Delete.

Data Filter Scenario in Marketing Cloud Engagement

You can use the data filter feature in Email Studio to segment a subscriber list with the filter activity.

A marketer at Northern Trail Outfitters wants to send a message about traveling in the Midwest to newsletter subscribers. The marketer

only wants to send it to subscribers who own a car or motorcycle and who live in Indiana or Ohio. The marketer creates a filter definition

that uses the subscriber attributes to select only subscribers who own at least one car or at least one motorcycle. The attributes are

further refined to subscribers who live in Indiana or Ohio.

The marketer clicks the names of the inner groupings to give them more descriptive names.

148

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The marketer creates a filter activity to associate the filter definition with the Newsletter list. The filter activity also specifies the name of

the group to contain the segment of subscribers that satisfy the filter definition.

149

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The marketer applies the filter, creates the group, and starts the filter activity.

When the marketer looks at the groups in the account, the Midwest Vehicle Owners from Newsletter List group appears in the list. The

marketer didn’t manually create this group; the application created it when the marketer saved the filter activity.

150

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

This group now behaves like any other group in the account. It can be sent to or refreshed at any time.

Enhanced Subscriber Feature Data Filter Operators

You can set profile and preference attributes for data filters using the enhanced subscriber feature in Email Studio.

Profile Attributes

You have the following options:

DescriptionFunction

Subscribers with an attribute definition that exactly matches the

value are included in the group. You can choose 1 value only.

is equal to

Subscribers with an attribute definition that does not match the

value are included in the group. You can choose 1 value only.

is not equal to

Use this operator when the attribute is a numeric value. Subscribers

with an attribute definition greater than or less than or equal to

the value are included in the group.

is greater than

greater than equal to

Use this operator when the attribute is a numeric value. Subscribers

with an attribute definition less than, less than, or equal to the

value are included in the group.

is less than

less than

equal to

The application looks for attribute values that begin with the exact

sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison value.

begins with

Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters. Search

strings are not case-sensitive.

The application looks for attribute values that include or exclude

the exact sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison

contains

does not contain

value. Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters.

Search strings are not case-sensitive.

The application looks for attribute values that end with the exact

sequence of characters that you enter as the comparison value.

ends with

Commas are treated as characters and not as delimiters. Search

strings are not case-sensitive.

Subscribers with an attribute definition that matches one of the

values you define in a comma delimited string of values are

exists in

151

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

DescriptionFunction

included in the group. The exists in operator looks for a partial

match of the entire value.

Example: If your match criteria is north, the ‘exists in’ operator

returns subscribers with north, northwest, and northeast attribute

values. Subscribers with south, southwest, and southeast attribute

values are not returned.

Subscribers with an attribute definition that do not match any of

the values you define in a comma delimited string of values are

does not exist in

included in the group. This operator is not applicable when

choosing an attribute with restricted values, as you can select only

one of the restricted values as the comparison value. Search strings

are not case-sensitive.

To filter for a blank value select is empty or is not empty.

is empty

is not empty

Preference Attributes

You have the following options:

DescriptionFunction

The application looks for of either a true or false value. Your only

options are True and False.

Data Filter Definition for Marketing Cloud Engagement

You can create a data filter definition on the Subscribers tab in Email Studio. Choose whether to create a filter that segments a subscriber

list or a data extension.

If you choose to create a data filter to segment a subscriber list, use any combination of the following types of information. The chosen

types determine whether the subscriber satisfies these conditions:

•

Profile attributes

•

Preference attributes, except the HTML email preference

•

Measures you create and predefined measures

You don’t have to specify a subscriber list in the filter definition. You can associate the same data filter to multiple different lists using

different filter activities or groups.

If you choose to create a data filter to segment a data extension, you use the field columns in the data extension. Those field columns

determine whether the record satisfies the conditions. Because different data extensions can have different field columns, specify the

data extension to segment when you create the data filter.

When you create a filter, you create conditions that the system evaluates against for each subscriber or data extension row. The conditions

determine whether it qualifies for the segment. You can select one of these parameters for each condition:

•

The profile attribute, field column, or measure to evaluate

152

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

The operator to use to compare the values

•

The value to compare against

Example: You can create a condition where:

•

The profile attribute is AGE

•

The operator is IS GREATER THAN

•

The value is 17

When you segment a subscriber list against this condition, only subscribers whose age is 18 or older satisfies the condition. It’s added

to the segment. You can put multiple conditions together in a grouping using an AND or OR operator.

You can also put multiple groupings together into an outer grouping that uses an AND or OR operator. When you use the OR operator,

a subscriber or row that meets one or more of the conditions satisfies the grouping. When you use the AND operator, a subscriber or

row must meet all the conditions to satisfy the grouping.

The data filter creation interface provides graphical tools for creating the conditions and groupings. The SQL created using the graphical

tools appears on the screen in the Filter Text section for your reference.

Filter Activity in Marketing Cloud Engagement

If you use interactions in Email Studio, you can use data filters to segment subscriber lists or data extensions. Select the data filter when

you create a filter activity.

Create filter activities on the Filter Activity screen on the Interactions tab. If you filter a subscriber list, select the list to segment with the

filter. Provide a name for the group to contain the resulting segment. If you filter a data extension, select the data filter and provide a

name for the data extension to contain the resulting segment.

After you create a filter activity, start it. When you start the data filter activity or refresh the group, the system applies the logic you created

in the data filter.

The subscriber list and filter definition must exist before you can select them on the filter activity. Enter the name of the resultant group

or data extension that the system creates when you save the filter activity.

Filter activities provide more robust API support than subscriber groups.

Data Filters in a Marketing Cloud Engagement Group

You can use data filters to segment subscriber lists by selecting the data filter when you create a group, regardless of whether you use

interactions in Email Studio.

The Create Subscriber Group wizard allows you to drag a Data Filter onto the canvas. When you create or refresh the group, the system

applies the logic. This logic you created in the data filter to the list you selected to populate the group. The subscriber list and filter

definition must exist before you can select them in the group creation wizard.

All Subscribers List in Email Studio

The All Subscribers list is considered the main list of records for the Email Studio account. Every subscriber in your account appears in

the All Subscribers list. Subscribers added to a subscriber list join the All Subscribers list at the same time. Subscribers stored on data

extensions join the All Subscribers list when you send your first message to that subscriber. If a subscriber is unsubscribed in the All

Subscribers list, the subscriber is unsubscribed from all lists and groups. When a subscriber is set back to active on the All Subscribers

list, the subscriber must also opt in for any other list and group separately. A subscriber can be unsubscribed on lists and groups and be

active on the All Subscribers lists.

Click All Subscribers in the navigation pane and then find the subscriber in the All Subscribers workspace in one of the following ways.

153

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

Sort: You can sort by clicking the column heading of any column with an arrow to the right of the column name. For example, to

sort alphabetically by email address, click Email Address. To reverse the sort, click the heading again. A small arrow in the column

heading indicates the direction of the sort. The columns you can sort by vary by feature.

•

Search: Use the Search feature to search by specific search criteria. Click View Properties that accompanies the search results to

view the subscriber's properties.

Note: The maximum number of subscribers that All Subscribers can store is 2,147,483,647.

SEE ALSO:

Subscriber Filters in Marketing Cloud

Enhanced Subscribers in Email Studio

Unsubscribe Settings

Exclusion Lists in Marketing Cloud Engagement

An exclusion list is any list, group, or data extension you create in the application that at the time of send you select to exclude from the

send. If your Email Studio account has subscriber key enabled, the system excludes using the subscriber key value. If your account does

not have subscriber key enabled, the system excludes using email address.

Example: A common case for exclusion lists is as follows: You send a newsletter to List A but later realize you want to send it to

List B. Some of the subscribers on List A also exist on List B and you don't want to send them the same email twice. When you

send to List B, you select List A as an exclusion list.

SEE ALSO:

Lists with Enhanced Subscriber Features

Groups with Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Publication Lists in Email Studio

Use publication and suppression lists to manage opt-ins for your email account in Email Studio. Use either publication lists or suppression

lists to control how subscribers receive your sends. Choose a publication list when sending email messages and SMS messages to a

sendable data extension.

Prerequisites

This document is intended for email users who are responsible for sending and managing email and SMS message sending. An

understanding of data extensions and the Web Service API may be required when working with publication lists.

Publication Lists

A publication list helps you manage how subscribers receive several different categories of emails or SMS messages. For example, send

newsletters, advertisements, and alerts. Each of these is a different category, so create a separate publication list for each category. When

you send a newsletter, associate the send with the newsletter publication list to identify to the system what kind of content is inside the

publication.

154

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Publication lists help you manage subscribers' unsubscribe or opt-out actions. Having a separate publication list for each communication

type enables you to honor an opt-out request from one publication type without unsubscribing that person from all previously

subscribed-to publications. If you use only one publication list for all of a subscriber's communications and if that person opts out of

one publication, that subscriber will be opted out automatically from all publications. Additionally:

•

Use a publication list to filter the audience of an email send, which ensures your publications are sent to the subscribers who want

to see them.

•

Use a publication list to show and adhere to regulatory compliance to CAN-SPAM laws.

•

Use a publication list for each communication type, such as newsletter, weather alerts, and coupons.

•

Use a publication list to control who receives particular communications from a company. In Enterprise 2.0, publication lists can be

shared between parent and child business units.

Publication Lists in Email Studio

Send an email or SMS messages using Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Create a Publication List in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a publication list in Email Studio.

155

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Apply a Publication List to a Marketing Cloud Engagement Send

Apply publication lists to guided sends, and user-initiated emails in Email Studio.

SEE ALSO:

Suppression Lists in Email Studio

Enterprise 2.0 Overview

Subscriber Filter Unsubscribe Settings

Publication Lists in Email Studio

Send an email or SMS messages using Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

When you send an email message or SMS message to a data extension, select a publication list. Publication lists are required to allow

subscribers to opt out of sends to data extensions. Publication lists make it possible for subscribers to opt out of a category of sends

without opting out of all messages from your organization.

For user-initiated email messages, the system uses the publication list exclusively to prevent sending to subscribers who have opted

out. For MT SMS communications, the system adds opted-in subscribers to the list of people to receive the SMS message and also

prevents sending to subscribers who have opted out.

Create a Publication List in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create a publication list in Email Studio.

When you create a publication list, give it a name and description to identify the publication list within the system. The name you enter

when you create the publication list is the name you choose when you’re selecting a publication list for a message send. If you make

the publication list public, subscribers see the publication list as an option on their subscription center. For SMS sends, subscribers can

opt in or opt out of a publication list, similar to an email list on the subscription center. For email sends, subscribers can only opt out of

a publication list. When subscribers opt in to an email publication from the subscription center, they only receive the email if they’re

also on the data extension being sent to.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click My Subscribers.

3. Click Publication Lists.

4. Click Create.

5. Provide a name and description for the publication list. The name and description appear in the Available Publications section of

the subscription center.

Note: If the list is used for SMS, name your publication list with no spaces. Add information to the description that identifies

this publication list is used for SMS.

6. Select Public to display the publication list in the subscription center.

7. Click Save.

8. If you’re sharing the publication list, select the checkbox next to the publication list and click Move.

9. Select the Shared Publication Lists folder, and click OK.

10. To set roles and permissions for the publication list, select the checkbox next to the publication list and click Permissions.

156

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Apply a Publication List to a Marketing Cloud Engagement Send

Apply publication lists to guided sends, and user-initiated emails in Email Studio.

1. Follow the steps for the sending method you’re using to send the email.

2. Select the publications to opt-out of this email on the select audience step.

Suppression Lists in Email Studio

You can use suppression and publication lists to manage opt-ins in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement. Use publication lists

when you send email and SMS messages to a sendable data extension. Use suppression lists with guided, user-initiated, and triggered

email sends.

A suppression list is a list of subscribers that you don't want to receive your communications. Suppression lists filter out subscriber keys

and prevent those keys from receiving your messages. Suppression lists serve as a “do not contact” list for your email sends.

Example: Suppression lists include these subscriber key types:

•

Keys with a history of spam complaints

•

Unsubscribe lists from previous providers or advertisers

•

Keys of your competitors

•

Canceled customers

Suppression lists help you manage the unsubscribe or opt-out actions of your subscribers. A single public suppression list affects the

subscription center.

Use suppression lists to:

•

Ensure that your messages are only sent to the subscribers who want to see them.

•

Demonstrate your compliance with anti-spam laws and regulations.

•

Control who receives particular communications from your company. In Enterprise 2.0, you can share suppression lists between

parent and child business units.

Suppression lists contain fields for Email Address, Subscriber Key, Unsubscribe Date, and Unsubscribe Reason. You can’t add to or remove

fields from a suppression list.

Using a Suppression List

A suppression list is a list of subscribers in Email Studio that you don't want to receive your communications. Suppression lists filter

out subscriber keys and prevent those keys from receiving your messages.

Subscribers on a Suppression List

Marketing Cloud Engagement lets you add subscribers to a suppression list in Email Studio via an Automation Studio import activity,

SOAP Web Services API, or the import wizard in Email Studio Suppression List. The subscriber must be imported without a status

column. Subscribers can also add themselves to public suppression lists via their subscriber center. When a subscriber uses a one-click

unsubscribe, the subscriber is added to the suppression list. The subscriber remains on the list, data extension, or publication list

with a status of Unsubscribed.

Create a Suppression List in Marketing Cloud Engagement

To prevent your users from receiving your messages, create a suppression list. You can also let users control whether they receive

messages by making the suppression list public in the subscription center.

157

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Apply a Suppression List to a Marketing Cloud Engagement Send

Apply suppression lists to guided sends, user-initiated, and triggered emails in Email Studio.

SEE ALSO:

Auto-Suppression Lists

Using a Suppression List

A suppression list is a list of subscribers in Email Studio that you don't want to receive your communications. Suppression lists filter out

subscriber keys and prevent those keys from receiving your messages.

Suppression lists serve as a do-not-contact list for your email sends.

Review these examples of subscriber key types included on a suppression list:

•

Keys with a history of spam complaints

•

Unsubscribe lists from previous providers or advertisers

•

Keys of your competitors

•

Canceled customers

Suppression lists differ from exclusion lists, although the filtering logic at send time is the same. Exclusion lists are subscribers who have

a status of active, bounced, held, or unsubscribed and who want to continue receiving messages. You select an exclusion list at the time

of send. For example, you send a newsletter to List A but later realize you want to send it to List B. Some of the subscribers on List A also

exist on List B and you don't want to send them the same email twice. When you send to List B, you select List A as an exclusion list.

SEE ALSO:

Enterprise 2.0 Shared Suppression Lists

Auto-Suppression Lists

Subscribers on a Suppression List

Marketing Cloud Engagement lets you add subscribers to a suppression list in Email Studio via an Automation Studio import activity,

SOAP Web Services API, or the import wizard in Email Studio Suppression List. The subscriber must be imported without a status column.

Subscribers can also add themselves to public suppression lists via their subscriber center. When a subscriber uses a one-click unsubscribe,

the subscriber is added to the suppression list. The subscriber remains on the list, data extension, or publication list with a status of

Unsubscribed.

Note: If a subscriber is imported into a suppression list with the status of Unsubscribed, this action results in an inactive record

being added to a suppression list. If the subscriber being imported exists in an active status, they’re no longer visible in the

suppression list and are deactivated from the list.

Create a Suppression List in Marketing Cloud Engagement

To prevent your users from receiving your messages, create a suppression list. You can also let users control whether they receive

messages by making the suppression list public in the subscription center.

1. In Marketing Cloud Engagement, go to the Subscribers tab.

2. Click Suppression List.

3. Click Create, and enter the list details.

158

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

4. To make the suppression list available in the subscription center, select Public.

5. Save the list.

6. To share the suppression list with other Email Studio users, select Permissions and set roles and permissions for the suppression

list.

Apply a Suppression List to a Marketing Cloud Engagement Send

Apply suppression lists to guided sends, user-initiated, and triggered emails in Email Studio.

1. Follow the steps for the sending method you’re using to send the email.

2. Select the suppression to opt-out of this email on the select audience step.

Profile and Preference Attributes in Email Studio

Email Studio uses profile and preference attributes to store information about subscribers. The profile attribute contains information to

characterize a subscriber profile. For example, each subscriber is asked to provide their birth date and email address. By default, every

account has three profile attributes: Full Name, Email, and UserDefined, which is intended as a generic attribute that you can use as

needed. By default, every account also receives an HTML Email preference attribute that is set to Yes. You can’t modify these attributes.

A preference attribute characterizes how a subscriber prefers to receive email. These attributes are specified as yes or no choices to a

declarative statement. For example: The subscriber prefers to receive email as HTML.

In addition to basic alphanumeric characters, certain special characters can be used in the values that you enter as a subscriber value

for an attribute. The special characters represented by the ASCII decimal codes 32 through 254 are supported.

Note: As some facets of account performance can be impacted by exceeding 200 profile attributes, the profile attribute limit is

200. If you approach this limit, delete existing attributes to avoid performance issues. If you require more than 200 profile attributes,

use data extensions to send instead of profile attributes.

Create a profile or preference attribute in your account so there’s a place for the system to store subscriber data. You also specify whether

an attribute is required information for every subscriber and whether subscribers can see and edit their own attributes in the Profile

Center. You can specify profile attributes when you import a subscriber list.

Note: If a subscriber uses the forward button in their email client instead of the Forward to a Friend feature to forward your email,

the profile center link points to the original subscriber's profile center. For example, if Lee forwards your email to Ali, and Ali clicks

the Profile Center link in the footer of the email, Ali sees Lee's information. To protect your subscribers' privacy, don’t include

sensitive attributes in the Profile Center.

The information is populated in profile and preference attributes when you import subscribers using the import subscriber wizard or

Automation Studio import activity, create a subscriber in the user interface, or otherwise add subscribers to your account, such as through

a Smart Capture form. The system processes the information and adds it to your account according to the parameters that you set up.

After you've defined your attributes, you can use them to create groups and drive dynamic content.

Profile and preference management is an advanced feature; if it isn’t enabled, you can’t see the Profile Management and Preference

Management sections in your navigation pane, and can’t preview the Profile Center and Subscription Center.

Scenario: Profile Attributes

See an example of portfolio attribute setting in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Scenario: Preference Properties Dialog Box

See this example of the Email Studio preference properties dialog box in use.

159

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Create Profile and Preference Attributes in Marketing Cloud Engagement

If the subscriber attribute is a yes or no value, create a preference attribute in Email Studio. If the attribute requires more complexity,

create a profile attribute. Create several attributes, up to the limit specified in your account contract. For Enterprise 2.0 accounts,

create the attribute in the top-level account.

Attribute Properties in Marketing Cloud

Use this topic as reference as you configure subscriber attributes in Email Studio.

Delete an Attribute in Marketing Cloud Engagement

In Email Studio, delete subscriber attributes you no longer want to track. Enterprise 2.0 accounts, delete the attribute in the top-level

account.

Modify an Attribute in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Modify subscriber attributes in Email Studio.

Scenario: Profile Attributes

See an example of portfolio attribute setting in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Example: Northern Trails wants to create a profile attribute for several of their subscribers. They navigate to Profile Management.

Starting on the General tab, Northern Trails fills in the information of the

attribute.

On the Data tab, they select Text for the Data Type since they will enter text only data.

160

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Northern Trails clicks the Values tab and adds Male and Female as values for the Gender attribute.

161

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

The values are entered, but Northern Trails wants Female to appear first. They highlight the Female value and click Move Up.

They click OK and the attribute is added to the attribute list.

Scenario: Preference Properties Dialog Box

See this example of the Email Studio preference properties dialog box in use.

Northern Trails wants to create a preference that allows subscribers to opt in or out of receiving a monthly newsletter. They navigate to

Preference Management. They enter the information for their preference.

162

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

They click OK and the preference appears in the preference list.

Create Profile and Preference Attributes in Marketing Cloud Engagement

If the subscriber attribute is a yes or no value, create a preference attribute in Email Studio. If the attribute requires more complexity,

create a profile attribute. Create several attributes, up to the limit specified in your account contract. For Enterprise 2.0 accounts, create

the attribute in the top-level account.

1. On the Subscribers tab, select Profile Management or Preference Management.

2. Click Create.

3. Define the properties for this attribute.

4. Click OK.

This attribute is now available for use in defining groups, dynamic content, and personalized substitution strings.

Note: If you marked the new attribute as a required field, all subscriber imports now must include this field. Set up a default value

so that records can be saved even if a value isn't provided.

Attribute Properties in Marketing Cloud

Use this topic as reference as you configure subscriber attributes in Email Studio.

163

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Table 3: General Tab

Enter the external name for this attribute. The name is what see

when you choose attributes for personalization in emails and for

Name

group creation. Unless the attribute is defined as hidden,

subscribers will also see this name in the Profile Center.

When you import subscribers, you are able to map subscriber data

fields to attribute fields manually. If the data field name in your

subscriber data exactly matches the profile name you enter here,

the application is able to default the mapping of those fields to

each other.

The first character of an attribute name must be alphabetic. Do

not begin an attribute name with a number or any other kind of

nonalphabetic character.

Enter an internal description of the attribute. This description is

displayed in the profile management workspace only and is not

exposed to subscribers.

Description

Descriptions are limited to 200 characters.

The Display Order field reflects this attribute's placement among

the profile attributes when displayed to subscribers in the Profile

Display Order

Center and also when displayed within the application in attribute

drop-down lists, for personalization in emails and for group

creation.

In the navigation pane of the application, the attributes are always

displayed in alphabetical order; not in the customizable display

order.

To change this attribute's placement in the list of attributes, click

the Change button beside the Display Order field. The Profile

Display Order dialog box that appears shows all the profile

attributes in display order. Use the Move Up or Move Down buttons

to move this attribute up or down in the list.

You can change only a single attribute's placement at a time. To

change another attribute's placement, you need to edit that

attribute's properties.

The Created and Modified fields automatically record when the

attribute was created and when it was last modified.

Created or Modified

You define whether the attribute is required and whether

subscribers can see and edit it.

Attributes

Required: When you create or import subscribers, this attribute is

a required field. Once an attribute is set up as required or not

required, the configuration cannot be changed after creation.

164

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Hidden: If you select this check box, the attribute will not be

displayed in the Profile Center. Subscribers will not be able to view

or edit this attribute.

Read-only: If you select this check box, the attribute is displayed

but will not be editable in the Profile Center. Subscribers are able

to see their value for this attribute but will not be able to change

it.

Attributes that are both required and hidden must include a default

value before a subscriber is added to the list using Forward To a

Friend in an email send.

Do not update subscriber values with send time values. If the

subscriber who exists in your system triggers a triggered send, this

checkbox determines whether the system updates the attribute

with the attribute values provided with the triggered send trigger.

Table 4: Data Tab

You have the following options for the type of data that this

attribute will accept as values:

Data Type

•

Text: Attributes of a text type accepts all alphanumeric

characters and common symbols. The Text type is appropriate

for strings of numbers that would not be involved in

calculations. Use the Text type for zip codes, phone numbers,

and credit cards.

•

Numeric: Use this data type only if your attribute values contain

nothing but numbers. You will not be able to enter a dollar

sign, a dash, or any other symbol or alphabetic character into

a numeric field. For best results, do not use Numeric for such

data as zip codes, phone numbers, and credit cards. Restrict

use of the Numeric type to values on which you may want to

perform calculations. Integers are supported in numeric fields.

Scientific numbers and floating decimal points are not

supported.

•

Date: Attributes of a date type will accept dates in various

formats, such as 1/1/2005 or January 1, 2005. All dates are

stored in the format MM/DD/YYYY, and if a date is entered in

a different format, the system converts it to the proper format

when storing it.

If you specify a default value for this attribute, this value is used for

all subscribers who do not have a value entered for the attribute.

Default Value

•

If you're defining a set of possible values for this attribute, you

must include the default value that you enter here in that list

on the Values tab.

165

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

If you save the attribute with a default value that is then applied

to all your existing subscribers, and you later delete the default

value, that value will be deleted from all the subscriber records

to which it was automatically applied.

•

Attributes that are both required and hidden must include a

default value before a subscriber is added to the list using

Forward To a Friend in an email send.

For text and date attributes, you can dictate the minimum number

of characters that are accepted when a value is entered for this

attribute.

Minimum Length/Value and Maximum Length/Value

For numeric attributes, you can dictate the minimum value that is

accepted.

Likewise, you can control the maximum length or value as well. If

no maximum is set, the application only allows 50 characters for

Ent 2.0 accounts and 2,000 characters for all other accounts;

however, if the attribute is set up as a triggered send send-time

attribute, there is no character limit.

Minimum/maximum value refers to the amount, not the number

of digits in the number. If you want to control the number of digits

in the entry, then the data type of the attribute should be Text

rather than Numeric. For example, a zip code, phone number, or

credit card number is a case where you would want to specify the

number of digits in the number, not the "value" of the number; in

these cases, the attribute should be marked as Text, not Numeric.

To specify a minimum and/or maximum, click the appropriate

radio button and then enter the minimum or maximum in the

corresponding text box.

For example, if the attribute is Year Born and you want to ensure

that only four-digit years are entered, you would enter 4 as both

the minimum length and the maximum length. To specify the

number of characters that can be entered, the attribute data type

must be text.

Table 5: Values Tab

To limit this attribute to a specific set of possible values, enter those

values on the Values tab.

Add Value

•

Once you define a value for this attribute, users and subscribers

will no longer be able to type in their own value; they will only

be able to select a value from the drop-down list of the values

specified on the Values tab.

•

If you are defining possible values for an existing attribute that

did not previously have value limitations, any values currently

166

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

entered in subscriber records are retained, even if those values

are not included in the list of possible values you've defined.

•

If you entered a default value on the Data tab, you must include

that value in the list of possible values on the Values tab.

On the Values tab, follow these steps to define the possible values

for this attribute:

1. Click the Add button to generate a new blank value.

2. Type in the value.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to add more values.

If you want to change the order in which these values appear in

the drop-down list, click a value and then click the Move Up or

Move Down button.

Reorder Values

To remove a value from the list, click the value and then click the

Remove button.

Remove Values

If any existing subscriber record contains the value you're removing

from the list, the subscriber will not be affected. That value remains

in the subscriber's record.

Table 6: Salesforce Tab

Select the field you'd like to link to in Salesforce.Map to Salesforce Lead Field

Select the field you'd like to link to in Salesforce.Map to Salesforce Contact/Account Field

Checking this box displays the information in the Salesforce Profile

Center.

Display on Salesforce Profile Center for Leads

Checking this box displays the information in the Salesforce Profile

Center.

Display on Salesforce Profile Center for Contacts

Important Information About the Values Tab and Default Values

If you specify a default value on the Data tab and then, on the Values tab, define a set of possible values that does not include the default

value you entered, the application changes the default value on the Data tab to be the first value from the Values tab.

If this attribute had existed with the original default value, then all subscribers to whom the default value was automatically applied is

adjusted to have the new default value. Subscribers for whom a value had been entered manually by a user or by an import will not be

affected.

Delete an Attribute in Marketing Cloud Engagement

In Email Studio, delete subscriber attributes you no longer want to track. Enterprise 2.0 accounts, delete the attribute in the top-level

account.

Note: Emails using the deleted attribute in personalized substitution strings or dynamic content, you must edit the email to

remove the reference to the attribute. Any groups that were based on the deleted attribute are unaffected by the deletion. The

167

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

subscribers in the groups are still members of the groups even though they no longer possess the attribute value that enabled

their group membership.

1. Click the attribute in the toolbar.

2. Click Delete.

The attribute no longer appears in any attribute listing, and all values entered in subscriber records for this attribute are lost.

Modify an Attribute in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Modify subscriber attributes in Email Studio.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click either Profile Management or Preference Management.

3. Click the attribute to modify.

4. Edit the properties as desired.

5. Click OK.

Subscriber Key in Marketing Cloud Engagement

A subscriber key is a text field that contains a value that uniquely identifies a subscriber in Marketing Cloud Engagement. A subscriber

key is limited to 254 English characters. Avoid using email addresses as subscriber keys.

When you use a subscriber key, the system uses this value to determine:

•

Whether a subscriber you import or create exists in the system.

•

Whether a subscriber appears multiple times on a list, group, or data extension to be sent a message. The subscriber key allows an

email address to be included multiple times related to different subscriber key values.

•

Which subscriber record to update when a subscriber accesses their profile center or subscription center.

•

Which subscriber record to unsubscribe when a subscriber clicks the unsubscribe link in an email.

A subscriber key gives you the ability to identify subscribers with a value that you choose and have an email address appear multiple

times related to different subscriber keys. Use a subscriber key to:

•

Maintain multiple sets of subscriber attributes for a single email address. For example, if a family shares an email address, you can

use a subscriber key to uniquely identify each member of the family.

•

Include a single email address multiple times on a list. For example, send a separate message for each car a subscriber owns in a

single send.

The Web Service SOAP API support functionality around subscribers identified with a subscriber key.

Note: Though the subscriber key is the unique identifier, you must also provide an email address for each subscriber. Spam

complaints are still tied to the email address.

For example, you could identify subscribers by an ID created by an external business system.

Note: A subscriber key can contain different kinds of identifying information. Different subscribers with different kinds of keys

could have the same information by coincidence. For example, if you import a subscriber keyed on phone number 3175551234

and a different subscriber keyed on external business system identifier 3175551234, the Marketing Cloud system interprets the

subscriber key as the same subscriber.

168

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Subscriber Key and Data Obscurity

When you use the data obscurity feature to protect your subscribers' personally identifiable data, the subscriber key is the only field in

your data extension that isn’t encrypted.

Searching for Subscribers

You can perform a subscriber search based on the subscriber key value, email address, domain, status, and HTML email preference.

Exporting Subscribers

You can identify the subscribers to export using the subscriber key value. Regardless of the search criteria you use, the subscriber key

value appears in the output file when you export subscribers.

Exporting Tracking Data

Exported tracking data is based on the subscriber key value. You can then import the tracking data into another business system and

connect the tracking data with the subscribers as you identify them in that system. For example, you can use the identifier from your

CRM system as the subscriber key. When you import the tracking data to your CRM system, the data is already connected to your contacts

via the contact identifier.

The All Subscribers list shows only the most recent email address for each subscriber key. For example, you send an email to subscriber

key “subkey1” using [email protected]. Then later, you send an email to the same subscriber key using [email protected]. The

All Subscribers list shows only [email protected].

Subscriber key values can’t contain these characters.

•

(

•

)

•

}

•

{

•

Subscriber Key Scenario in Marketing Cloud

Review a scenario on using a subscriber key in Marketing Cloud Email Studio.

169

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Identify Unique Subscribers Using Keys in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Identify unique subscribers by a value that isn’t an email address by enabling subscriber keys. Changing your implementation to use

subscriber keys takes careful planning to avoid losing data during the process. To learn the best way to prepare and migrate your

data, work with your account executive.

Subscriber Key Scenario in Marketing Cloud

Review a scenario on using a subscriber key in Marketing Cloud Email Studio.

The Northern Trail Outfitters loyalty program allows families to opt-in together with a single email address. The marketer responsible for

the loyalty program wants to send birthday discount coupons for each member in the family. The marketer uses a subscriber key using

the loyalty card ID. Subscriber key allows each member of the family to share the email address but have separate subscriber attributes.

Subscriber key also allows the email address to appear on the birthday list multiple times if multiple members of the family have the

same birthday. The Cruz family opts into the loyalty program with the same email address, and their twin daughters have the same

birthday.

When the marketer refreshes the birthday group on the twins' birthday, the system collects each unique subscriber key with a DOB value

equal to the current date. Even though Lisa and Jill share an email address, each appears separately in the group.

When the birthday email goes out to the Loyalty Birthday List, Lisa and Jill each receive a separate email to their family's shared address.

170

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Identify Unique Subscribers Using Keys in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Identify unique subscribers by a value that isn’t an email address by enabling subscriber keys. Changing your implementation to use

subscriber keys takes careful planning to avoid losing data during the process. To learn the best way to prepare and migrate your data,

work with your account executive.

When organizing your migration data, make sure that every subscriber record contains a unique value for the subscriber key. The migration

process can take up to one week during which your account can’t send messages or process imports.

1. Contact your account executive regarding your data structure and planning the migration.

2. Choose an identifier for your subscriber key, and apply those values to every subscriber.

171

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

3. If you use SOAP API, modify your code to include the SubscriberKey property for all Subscriber and Retrieve calls.

Profile Center for Marketing Cloud Engagement

The Profile Center is a web page where subscribers enter and maintain the personal information that you keep about them. When you

import a list in Email Studio, you can import attribute values for your subscribers. Subscribers can see this information in the Profile Center

and update and add to it. Every email that you send through Email Studio contains a link to the Profile Center for subscribers to use.

The link to the Profile Center is included by default in emails based on the standard templates. To disable the default link, in Setup, go

to Email > Feature Settings > Email Studio > Optional Features. For HTML emails, you're prompted to include the link when

building the email. Subscribers see all the attributes defined in your account that you don't mark as hidden. If the attribute is read-only,

subscribers can see the value but can’t change it.

The Profile Center includes a global opt-out option. The Profile Center also works closely with the Subscription Center.

What Goes in the Profile Center

The Email application uses the information in the Profile Center to personalize emails sent to your subscribers. The links in each email

send connect your subscribers directly to their Profile Center page, and subscribers can access their Profile Center page to view and

change this information.

To help protect the privacy of your subscribers, be sure that the information you enter in the Profile Center doesn’t include sensitive or

personal information. Include only the information necessary to manage the profile. If an email is forwarded to another person via an

email client instead of Forward To A Friend, the link in the email leads to the original subscriber’s Profile Center, Subscription Center, or

Unsubscribe page.

To change the Profile Center’s color and logo, see BrandBuilder on page 15.

Preview the Profile Center

Preview the subscriber profile center in Email Studio.

Preview the Profile Center

Preview the subscriber profile center in Email Studio.

•

Attributes shown with a red asterisk are those that are defined in your account as required.

•

Attributes that are defined in your account as hidden are not displayed.

•

Attributes that are defined in your account as read-only are not editable.

1. Click Subscribers tab.

2. Click Profile Management or Preference Management.

3. In the profile/preference management toolbar, click Preview Profile Center, which opens the web page that subscribers see.

Preview the Subscription Center

You can view the Subscription Center through Email Studio Profile Center in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

1. Click Subscribers.

2. Click Profile Management.

3. Click Preview Profile Center.

4. Click the Subscription Center link that you see on the left side of the Profile Center web page.

Note the following about the Subscription Center:

172

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

The Available Publications section displays all lists that are defined in your account as public. The subscriber can choose to

subscribe to or unsubscribe from any of them.

•

The Unsubscribe from All option allows the subscriber to remove himself or herself from all your publications.

Add a Link to the Subscription Center in an Email

Add a link to your subscription center to an email created in Email Studio.

Add a Link to the Subscription Center in an Email

Add a link to your subscription center to an email created in Email Studio.

If you're creating an email based on a standard template, a link to the Subscription Center is included by default in the email footer.

However, there may be times you want to include a link in the body of your email. For example, you might want to encourage your

readers to subscribe to other lists you have. In that case, you could say something like, "Visit our Subscription Center to sign up and

receive our Monthly Newsletter."

1. Type or highlight the text in your content area to link. Example: Visit our Subscription Center.

2. Click Insert Link.

3. In Link URL, enter the Subscription Center personalization string: %%subscription_center_url%%

4. Select Other in the Link To field.

5. Click OK.

6. Click Save to save the content.

SEE ALSO:

Headers and Footers

Send to a List in Email Studio

Send to a subscriber list with enhanced features in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud Engagement.

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Lists.

3. From here there are multiple locations to send from:

•

Click the checkboxes next to each list to send to and click Send.

•

Under Actions click Send.

•

Click the name of a list and click Send.

4. Click Next.

5. Select the email to send.

6. Click Next.

7. Choose the email to send to the lists.

8. Choose Recipients Dialog Box - the lists previously selected are checked. Optional, you can add or remove groups and lists in this

step.

Select the target recipients to send the email to. Can you send to lists and groups, or data extensions with an associated publication

list, or an Audience with an associated publication list, or a Data Filter with an associated publication list. Depending on the features

173

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

enabled you see different options. We recommend sending to a maximum of 50 lists. If you exceed 50 lists, you can have trouble

viewing tracking for that send. When sending to data extensions or an audience check De-duplicate subscribers by email address

if you do not want subscribers to receive multiple emails.

9. Click Next.

10. Choose Excludes and Suppressions Dialog Box

This box allows you to refine your recipients and is an optional step depending on your business needs. This option is only used

when some subscribers are selected as recipients but you do not want to send to them. Any recipient that is listed as a target audience

and listed on an exclude or suppression list will not get the email.

•

Select the subscribers you wish to exclude or suppression from this send.

11. Click Next.

12. Send Options Dialog Box

•

Subject - Select the Insert Dynamic Content icon next to the subject line to send a dynamic subject email. Select the Insert

Personalization icon to add personalization to the subject line.

•

Preheader - Preheader is text displayed after the subject line when an email is previewed. The preheader can be modified in

email properties.

•

From Options:

–

If you wish to choose a specific email address from which you want to send the email message, click the top radio button

next to Use the following from name and address. Select the from name and address in the dropdown menu.

–

If you wish to use a send classification, click the radio button next to Select a send classification and select the send

classification from the dropdown menu.

•

Override sender profile with: - Determines whether the interaction uses a different sender profile than what is specified

on the send classification. If you select this checkbox, you must select a sender profile to use.

•

Override delivery profile with: - Determines whether the interaction uses a different delivery profile than what is specified

on the send classification. If you select this checkbox, you must select a delivery profile to use. Contact Global Support

or your account representative if these options are not available and you are interested in having then enabled.

•

Send Options:

–

Allows you to select Send as Multipart MIME. The system sends both the HTML and Text version of the email (including

the text version you have created) and whichever version is accepted by the subscriber's email client is delivered. If Multipart

MIME is not enabled in your account contact global support to have it enabled.

–

Allows you select Track all links found within this email. If you select this checkbox, the system collects tracking on the

links.

–

Allows you to select to Suppress this send from reports. If you select this checkbox, the email is sent to the designated

list without the job appearing in the Performance Reports. The job is automatically added to the Test Send Emails folder.

–

Allows you to select Enable send logging to a data extension. If Send Logging is not enabled in your account contact

global support to have it enabled.

–

Allows you to select the Tracking Destination folder. If you select a predefined folder, the job will automatically be placed

in that folder at the time of send.

•

Testing Options - If this feature is enabled in your account, the Email Send Wizard includes an option labeled Send All Emails

to. An email is generated for each subscriber and delivered to a single test address that you specify. The key benefit of this option

is that you are able to see exactly how each email looks to each subscriber. If you used personalization strings and/or dynamic

content in the email, each email contains the data specific to the targeted subscriber. Emails that you send to a test list or via

the Email Send Wizard's test option are charged to your account in the same way as any emails that you send to your subscribers.

174

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Keep in mind that the test email address receives as many email messages as there are subscribers on the list or group selected.

If the lists and groups you select contain many subscribers, using this feature may not be a feasible option contact global support

to have it enabled.

13. Click Next.

14. Schedule Send Dialog Box

•

Send Email - This box allows you to select whether to send your email Immediately or Later. If you choose Later, you can select

the date and time of the send.

•

Send Throttling - Send Throttling allows you to select a range of hours during which you want to send your email. A Start and

End time required. You can also specify how many emails you want to send per hour during that time.

The system sends emails during the hours you specify every day (starting the day you send the email) until all the emails are sent.

When using Send Throttling, you should not schedule the email in the upper half of the dialog box. Send throttling overrides

scheduling, but scheduling the email can corrupt the send throttle process. It's imperative that you either schedule the email to

send in the future or select the Send Throttle checkbox.

The system begins processing the email send job at the start time you specify. The send is not spread evenly between the start and

end times. The system continues sending during the specified time range until the send is complete or the end time you specified

is reached, whichever comes first. If the end time is reached before the send is complete, the system will continue the send the next

day at the same start time. This process continues until the send is complete.

You can use Send Throttling for the following reasons:

•

To control inbound traffic to a website, meaning, the interest generated by email may result in server crashes due to too many

people visiting.

•

To limit the number of emails sent to a particular domain each hour.

15. Click Next.

16. Confirm Send Dialog Box

This box allows you to review the summary of your email's information before sending. If there are validation errors, you see the

Validations errors dialog box.

17. After verifying all the information is correct, select the This information is correct check box and click Send.

Classic Subscribers in Email Studio

Learn more about subscribers functionality when the enhanced subscriber features enabled in Email Studio for Marketing Cloud

Engagement.

1. Subscribers without Enhanced Subscriber Features

Some details change based on whether you enable enhanced subscriber features for Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Review requirements for when these features aren't enabled.

175

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

2. Lists without Enhanced Subscriber Features

A list is a collection of subscribers that receive your communications. All your subscribers belong to the All Subscribers list in your

Email Studio account. You create as many lists as you need to segment your subscribers so that you can target your email

communications. For example, you can create a list for your monthly newsletter, your weekly coupon offer, and a special

announcements list. After you create a list, you can send emails using your list or you can create a group from a list to target a more

specific segment of subscribers.

3. Groups without Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

This information applies to accounts that don’t have the enhanced subscriber features turned on in Email Studio. Refer to Groups

with Enhanced Subscriber Features if your Email Studio account has enhanced subscriber enabled.

4. Data Extensions and Data Relationships without Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

A data extension in Email Studio is a table within the application database that contains your data. You can import data into data

extensions with the application interface. You can create, update, and delete rows in a data extension by using the Marketing Cloud

Engagement SOAP API.

5. Data Filters without Enhanced Subscriber Features in Marketing Cloud Engagement

This information applies to Marketing Cloud Engagement accounts that use classic subscriber features and not enhanced subscriber

features in Email Studio. Understand AND and OR logical operators when using the data filter feature. A data filter is a group of criteria

that segments a subscriber list or data extension.

6. Measures

A measure is a unit of subscriber behavior that you define in Email Studio. After you create a measure, you can include the measure

as criteria in a data filter to segment a subscriber list using the measure.

Subscribers without Enhanced Subscriber Features

Some details change based on whether you enable enhanced subscriber features for Email Studio in Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Review requirements for when these features aren't enabled.

Email Message Requirements

A valid email address for each subscriber is fewer than 100 characters long, has no leading or trailing spaces, and contains only supported

ASCII characters

Status

When exporting individual subscriber data or when exporting an entire subscriber list, include the subscriber's email status. You can

also filter subscriber searches by status. Your subscriber workspace uses color-coded icons to indicate subscriber status.

ExplanationStatusColor Code

A subscriber who meets either of these

criteria is considered active.

Active

Green

•

No activities have occurred to make the

subscriber's status bounced,

undeliverable, unsubscribed, or deleted.

•

A subscriber whose status was bounced

or undeliverable is recorded as having

opened or clicked through a received

176

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

ExplanationStatusColor Code

email. In this case, the system changes

the subscriber's status back to active.

A subscriber who meets the following

criteria is considered bounced.

Bounced

(Returned)

Yellow

•

One or 2 soft bounces are received for

the subscriber.

•

One hard bounce is received for the

subscriber.

A subscriber who meets the following

criteria is considered held (undeliverable).

Held

(Undeliverable)

Gray

Three hard bounces or three soft bounces

are received for the subscriber and at least

15 days have passed since the first bounce.

If the bounce was from a trusted domain,

only one hard bounce is required. For the

most current list of trusted domains, contact

[email protected].

A subscriber who meets any of the following

criteria is considered unsubscribed:

Unsubscribed

Red

•

The subscriber has requested to be

removed from a single list, multiple lists,

or all lists. The subscriber's status is

changed to ‘unsubscribed’ for one or

more selected lists or at the all

subscribers level.

•

An Engagement user manually

unsubscribes a subscriber on a list, thus

changing the status to ‘unsubscribed’

for that list.

•

The subscriber submitted an AOL spam

complaint. In this case, the subscriber's

status is changed to ‘unsubscribed’ at

the all subscribers level.

A subscriber who meets either of the

following criteria is considered deleted:

DeletedNone

•

An Engagement deleted a subscriber

from a list other than the all subscribers

list. In this case, the subscriber's status

for that list only is deleted.

177

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

ExplanationStatusColor Code

•

An Engagement user has deleted a

subscriber from the all subscribers list.

In this case, the subscriber's global

status is deleted.

We don’t recommend deleting subscribers.

To prevent sending to a subscriber in a

future send, update the subscriber's status

to unsubscribed.

Add a Subscriber Manually

You can define an individual subscriber in Email Studio. When you add one subscriber, you have the option of creating another

individual subscriber with the same attribute selections.

Search for a Subscriber

You can search for a subscriber in Email Studio by using the supported search fields. You can further filter the search by specifying

text for email address, domain, HTML email preference, and subscriber status. You can view properties or export the found subscribers.

Subscriber Properties Access Locations

Access a subscriber record, using the Subscriber Properties dialog box, in Email Studio from any of these locations.

Export Subscribers by Status

Any user in Email Studio with access lists permission can export subscribers.

Remove Subscribers with Hard Bounces

A hard bounce occurs when an email server rejects an email due to permanent conditions, such as unknown user or domain errors.

Delete a Subscriber

You can delete a subscriber from all your lists in Email Studio.

Subscriber Data

View subscriber data and modify subscribers from Subscriber Properties. The changes you make take effect throughout Email Studio.

SEE ALSO:

Get Access to Enhanced Segmentation and Subscriber Features

Add a Subscriber Manually

You can define an individual subscriber in Email Studio. When you add one subscriber, you have the option of creating another individual

subscriber with the same attribute selections.

If you're using a reseller or enterprise account and have enabled unsubscribe management, you can’t add email addresses that appear

on the global unsubscribe list or your account-level unsubscribe list.

1. Choose Subscribers > My Lists and select a list.

2. Choose Create > Next.

3. Complete the subscriber identity fields.

a. Enter the full email address of the subscriber. This field is required.

b. To activate its data entry field, choose one of the profiles attributes defined in your account.

178

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

If the attribute has been defined to accept specific values only, the data entry field is a dropdown list from which you select

the desired value. Otherwise, the data entry field is a text box.

•

If a default value has been defined for the attribute, that value is displayed in the data entry field. Profile attributes displayed

in red are required fields.

c. Select or deselect one of the corresponding preference attributes as appropriate for this subscriber.

Note: For Enterprise Accounts, Channel Name is a required attribute field for all subscribers in your Enterprise administrator

account. Each subscriber must be associated with an On Your Behalf account.

4. Choose Next.

Note: If the email address you entered exists in your account, a prompt appears with the option for you to view the existing

subscriber's properties. To continue, enter a different email address for your new subscriber.

5. Select each list to which you want to add this subscriber. If you started from a particular list, that list is selected already and can be

deselected if desired.

Note: Every subscriber is added to your main All Subscriber list. Leave all other lists deselected if you don’t want to add the

subscriber to any of your accounts' lists.

6. Choose Finish. You can create another individual subscriber.

7. To start with a copy of the profile and preference attributes you defined for the previous subscriber, select Use attribute values

from previous subscriber and choose Create.

8. To start from scratch, choose Create.

9. When you’re done creating subscribers, choose Finish.

Your new subscriber now exists in your All Subscribers list and in any lists you selected in the wizard. The subscriber isn’t automatically

added to groups. If the subscriber's profile or preference attributes would make the subscriber eligible for a rule-based group, refresh

the group to add the subscriber.

Search for a Subscriber

You can search for a subscriber in Email Studio by using the supported search fields. You can further filter the search by specifying text

for email address, domain, HTML email preference, and subscriber status. You can view properties or export the found subscribers.

1. Choose All Subscribers > Search.

2. To choose from the supported search fields, choose Search where.

3. Enter the subscriber's data for the selected search field in the Is equal to field.

•

Email Address: Enter the subscriber's full email address that matches the email address in the subscriber's record. This field is

not case-sensitive.

•

Domain: Enter only the domain portion of the subscriber's email address. For example, yahoo.com. HTML Email preference:

Choose Yes or No from the Is equal to field.

•

Subscriber Status: Choose a subscriber status from the Is equal to field.

Note: Returned is the same as Bounced, and Undeliverable is the same as Held.

4. Click Find Now.

5. Select the subscriber in the search results and choose one of the options.

•

To view the subscriber’s properties, open the Subscriber Properties modal for this subscriber.

179

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

•

To export the subscriber, open the Export to a File wizard to export this subscriber's data to a file.

6. Exit the Search Subscribers modal.

Subscriber Properties Access Locations

Access a subscriber record, using the Subscriber Properties dialog box, in Email Studio from any of these locations.

Once you've located the subscriber in the list or group workspace, select the subscriber and choose View Properties.

Access instructionsSubscriber Properties

Double-click the list in the workspace to see all subscribers on the

list.

A list that contains the subscriber

Double-click the group in the workspace to see all subscribers in

the group.

A group the subscriber belongs to

The All Subscribers list is the master list of records for the account.

Unsubscribing from All Subs removes the subscriber from all lists

All Subscribers list

and groups. Reactivated subscribers must be added to each group

and list following reactivation. A subscriber can be unsubscribed

on lists and groups and be active the All Subscribers list.

Find subscribers in the All Subscribers workspace by searching or

sorting.

Export Subscribers by Status

Any user in Email Studio with access lists permission can export subscribers.

1. Choose Subscribers.

2. Choose All Subscribers or my lists and open the list you want to export from.

3. Choose Search.

4. Choose Subscriber Status.

5. Select the subscriber status you want to export under Is equal to.

6. Choose Find Now. The system generates your search results.

7. Choose Export and follow the export wizard.

Remove Subscribers with Hard Bounces

A hard bounce occurs when an email server rejects an email due to permanent conditions, such as unknown user or domain errors.

1. To eliminate the known invalid email addresses that hard-bounced from future email sends, update your internal database.

2. Upload these addresses into your All Subscribers list in Unsubscribed status.

Create List of Hard Bounced Email Addresses

You can create a list in Email Studio of hard-bounced email addresses.

180

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Update Hard Bounced Subscribers

Update your hard-bounced subscribers in your spreadsheet program, outside of Email Studio.

SEE ALSO:

Bounce Mail Management in Email Studio

Create List of Hard Bounced Email Addresses

You can create a list in Email Studio of hard-bounced email addresses.

1. Choose Tracking.

2. Click the job you want to view.

3. Choose the link next to Hard Bounce to open a list of the hard-bounced subscribers from your chosen campaign.

4. Choose Export.

a. Choose comma-separated value (.csv) for Export Type.

b. Choose your preferred delivery method.

5. Choose Finish.

The system outputs a .csv file that you reimport.

Update Hard Bounced Subscribers

Update your hard-bounced subscribers in your spreadsheet program, outside of Email Studio.

Note: This procedure begins outside Email Studio and in your spreadsheet application.

1. Add a column named Status to your hard-bounce file.

2. Populate this field with the word Unsubscribed for each subscriber.

3. Import the hard-bounce file to your All Subscribers list. Upload to your All Subscribers list to avoid future list creation with invalid

addresses.

4. Check the Update Subscriber Records checkbox in the Import Wizard.

5. Map the Email Address and Status fields.

6. Import your file.

7. Spot check to ensure that subscribers have been unsubscribed appropriately.

SEE ALSO:

Import Activity in Email Studio

Delete a Subscriber

You can delete a subscriber from all your lists in Email Studio.

Note: To fully delete all contact information from Marketing Cloud Engagement, delete the contact record in Contact Builder

using Contact Deletion.

Note: Tracking data for deleted subscribers and contacts are retained in anonymized format and can’t be linked to a specific

record. Tracking and reports show clicks from [email protected] and an IP address of 0.0.0.0 for deleted records.

181

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

Warning: To prevent future sends to a subscriber, update the subscriber’s status to Unsubscribed

1. Hover over Subscribers.

2. Click Subscribers.

3. Click the name of the list that contains the subscriber to delete.

4. Click Search.

5. To choose from the supported search fields, click Search where.

6. In the Is equal to field, enter the subscriber's data for the selected search field.

•

Email Address: Enter the subscriber's full email address.

Note: What you enter here must match the email address in the subscriber's record. This field isn’t case-sensitive.

•

Domain: Enter just the domain portion of the subscriber's email address.

Note: For example, yahoo.com.

•

HTML Email preference: The Is equal to field becomes a dropdown list with two options to choose from, Yes or No.

•

Subscriber Status: The Is equal to field becomes a dropdown with the following options to choose from, Active, Returned,

Undeliverable, or Unsubscribed.

Note: Returned is the same as Bounced and Undeliverable is the same as Held.

7. Click Find Now. The application scans your subscribers for one or more matches and displays the results.

8. Select the desired subscriber in the search results.

9. Click Delete Subscriber.

10. Click OK.

11. To exit the Search Subscribers box, click Close.

Note: After a subscriber is deleted, they no longer appear on any of your lists in Email Studio, including the All Subscribers

list. If you import a list that includes this subscriber or if you manually add the subscriber, the subscriber reappears on your

lists. To ensure you don’t send any emails to this subscriber in the future, use the Unsubscribe feature instead of deleting the

subscriber. Unsubscribe prevents the subscriber from being imported into the system accidentally.

Subscriber Data

View subscriber data and modify subscribers from Subscriber Properties. The changes you make take effect throughout Email Studio.

InstructionsField

Update the subscriber's email address on the General tab of the

modal.

Email address

History shows a list of every action the subscriber has taken with

emails received from you in the past 90 days. If the activity is a

Email history

survey response, view that activity’s details to see the subscriber's

survey responses. The General tab shows how many times an email

to this subscriber has bounced.

182

SubscribersEmail in Marketing Cloud Engagement

InstructionsField

To remove a subscriber from all lists and prevent any emails from

being sent, choose Unsubscriber from all and enter a description.

Unsubscribe

The unsubscribe field places the subscriber on your account's

master unsubscribe list.

Note: This process is the same as when a subscriber

chooses to unsubscribe from all your publications in the

Subscription Center.

Activate a subscriber using Subscriber Properties. Activate

re-enables the subscriber to be added to other lists and groups.

Activate

Attributes show a subscriber's data for each profile and preference

attribute. Enter or modify attribute data here.

Attributes

Note: If necessary attributes without default values are

added to your account since a subscriber was last modified,

specify values for these attributes. Refresh each group a

reactivated subscriber is added to see that subscriber’s

membership.

Lists show lists a subscriber belongs to.

Lists

•

Details show when the subscriber was added to or

unsubscribed from this list. If the subscriber has been

unsubscribed from the list, you can reactivate the subscriber's

membership here.

•

Expand the list folders to add the subscriber to one or more

lists.

Groups show groups this subscriber belongs to. To add a subscriber

back to this group, choose Activate.

Groups

Lists without Enhanced Subscriber Features

A list is a collection of subscribers that receive your communications. All your subscribers belong to the All Subscribers list in your Email

Studio account. You create as many lists as you need to segment your subscribers so that you can target your email communications.

For example, you can create a list for your monthly newsletter, your weekly coupon offer, and a special announcements list. After you

create a list, you can send emails using your list or you can create a group from a list to target a more specific segment of subscribers.

When you create a list, you decide whether to make it public. If you make a list public, then a subscriber sees the name of the list in the

Subscription Center and has the option to opt in or -out of the list.

Note: If a subscriber uses the forward button in their email client instead of the Forward to a Friend feature to forward your email,

the subscription center link still points to the original subscriber's subscription center. For example, if Lee forwards your email to

Ali, and Ali clicks the Subscription Center link in the footer of the email, Ali sees Lee's subscriptions.

You must first create a list, then you can add subscribers to lists in one of two ways:

•

Individually

183